LA-110

Installation and Operation Manual

Dedicated ATM IAD

LA-110 Dedicated ATM IAD

Installation and Operation Manual

Notice This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications Ltd. ("RAD"). No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RAD Data Communications.

Right, title and interest, all information, copyrights, patents, know-how, trade secrets and other intellectual property or other proprietary rights relating to this manual and to the LA-110 and any software components contained therein are proprietary products of RAD protected under international copyright law and shall be and remain solely with RAD.

LA-110 is a registered trademark of RAD. No right, license, or interest to such trademark is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right, license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark.

You shall not copy, reverse compile or reverse assemble all or any portion of the Manual or the LA-110. You are prohibited from, and shall not, directly or indirectly, develop, market, distribute, license, or sell any product that supports substantially similar functionality as the LA-110, based on or derived in any way from the LA-110. Your undertaking in this paragraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement.

This Agreement is effective upon your opening of the LA-110 package and shall continue until terminated. RAD may terminate this Agreement upon the breach by you of any term hereof. Upon such termination by RAD, you agree to return to RAD the LA-110 and all copies and portions thereof.

For further information contact RAD at the address below or contact your local distributor.

International Headquarters RAD Data Communications Ltd. 24 Raoul Wallenberg St. Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Tel: 972-3-6458181 Fax: 972-3-6498250 E-mail: rad@rad.co.il

U.S. Headquarters RAD Data Communications Inc. 900 Corporate Drive Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA Tel: (201) 529-1100, Toll free: 1-800-444-7234 Fax: (201) 529-5777 E-mail: market@radusa.com

© 2000-2002 RAD Data Communications Ltd. Publication No. 144-200-11/02

Limited Warranty

RAD warrants to DISTRIBUTOR that the hardware in the LA-110 to be delivered hereunder shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of twelve (12) months following the date of shipment to DISTRIBUTOR.

If, during the warranty period, any component part of the equipment becomes defective by reason of material or workmanship, and DISTRIBUTOR immediately notifies RAD of such defect, RAD shall have the option to choose the appropriate corrective action: a) supply a replacement part, or b) request return of equipment to its plant for repair, or c) perform necessary repair at the equipment's location. In the event that RAD requests the return of equipment, each party shall pay one-way shipping costs.

RAD shall be released from all obligations under its warranty in the event that the equipment has been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident or improper installation, or if repairs or modifications were made by persons other than RAD's own authorized service personnel, unless such repairs by others were made with the written consent of RAD.

The above warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied. There are no warranties which extend beyond the face hereof, including, but not limited to, warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and in no event shall RAD be liable for consequential damages.

RAD shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages, including, but not limited to, lost profits from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture, sale, handling, repair, maintenance or use of the LA-110, and in no event shall RAD's liability exceed the purchase price of the LA-110.

DISTRIBUTOR shall be responsible to its customers for any and all warranties which it makes relating to LA-110 and for ensuring that replacements and other adjustments required in connection with the said warranties are satisfactory.

Software components in the LA-110 are provided "as is" and without warranty of any kind. RAD disclaims all warranties including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. RAD shall not be liable for any loss of use, interruption of business or indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages of any kind. In spite of the above RAD shall do its best to provide error-free software products and shall offer free Software updates during the warranty period under this Agreement.

RAD's cumulative liability to you or any other party for any loss or damages resulting from any claims, demands, or actions arising out of or relating to this Agreement and the LA-110 shall not exceed the sum paid to RAD for the purchase of the LA-110. In no event shall RAD be liable for any indirect, incidental, consequential, special, or exemplary damages or lost profits, even if RAD has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

This Agreement shall be construed and governed in accordance with the laws of the State of Israel.

General Safety Instructions The following instructions serve as a general guide for the safe installation and operation of telecommunications products. Additional instructions, if applicable, are included inside the manual.

Safety Symbols

This symbol may appear on the equipment or in the text. It indicates potential safety hazards regarding product operation or maintenance to operator or service personnel.

Danger of electric shock! Avoid any contact with the marked surface while the product is energized or connected to outdoor telecommunication lines.

.

Protective earth: the marked lug or terminal should be connected to the building protective earth bus.

Some products may be equipped with a laser diode. In such cases, a label with the laser class and other warnings as applicable will be attached near the optical transmitter. The laser warning symbol may be also attached. Please observe the following precautions: • Before turning on the equipment, make sure that the fiber optic cable is

intact and is connected to the transmitter. • Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current. • Do not use broken or unterminated fiber-optic cables/connectors or look

straight at the laser beam. • The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard. • Use of controls, adjustments or performing procedures other than those

specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

ATTENTION: The laser beam may be invisible!

Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this product. Only qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment, maintenance or repairs to this product. No installation, adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be performed by either the operator or the user.

Warning

Warning

Handling Energized Products General Safety Practices Do not touch or tamper with the power supply when the power cord is connected. Line voltages may be present inside certain products even when the power switch (if installed) is in the OFF position or a fuse is blown. For DC-powered products, although the voltages levels are usually not hazardous, energy hazards may still exist.

Before working on equipment connected to power lines or telecommunication lines, remove jewelry or any other metallic object that may come into contact with energized parts.

Unless otherwise specified, all products are intended to be grounded during normal use. Grounding is provided by connecting the mains plug to a wall socket with a protective earth terminal. If an earth lug is provided on the product, it should be connected to the protective earth at all times, by a wire with a diameter of 18 AWG or wider. Rack-mounted equipment should be mounted only in earthed racks and cabinets.

Always make the ground connection first and disconnect it last. Do not connect telecommunication cables to ungrounded equipment. Make sure that all other cables are disconnected before disconnecting the ground.

Connection of AC Mains Make sure that the electrical installation complies with local codes.

Always connect the AC plug to a wall socket with a protective ground.

The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.

Always connect the power cord first to the equipment and then to the wall socket. If a power switch is provided in the equipment, set it to the OFF position. If the power cord cannot be readily disconnected in case of emergency, make sure that a readily accessible circuit breaker or emergency switch is installed in the building installation.

Connection of DC Mains Unless otherwise specified in the manual, the DC input to the equipment is floating in reference to the ground. Any single pole can be externally grounded.

Due to the high current capability of DC mains systems, care should be taken when connecting the DC supply to avoid short-circuits and fire hazards.

DC units should be installed in a restricted access area, i.e. an area where access is authorized only to qualified service and maintenance personnel.

Make sure that the DC supply is electrically isolated from any AC source and that the installation complies with the local codes.

The maximum permissible current capability of the branch distribution circuit that supplies power to the product is 16A. The circuit breaker in the building installation should have high breaking capacity and must operate at short-circuit current exceeding 35A.

Before connecting the DC supply wires, ensure that power is removed form the DC circuit. Locate the circuit breaker of the panel board that services the equipment and switch it to the OFF position. When connecting the DC supply wires, first connect the ground wire to the corresponding terminal, then the positive pole and last the negative pole. Switch the circuit breaker back to the ON position.

A readily accessible disconnect device that is suitably rated and approved should be incorporated in the building installation.

Connection of Data and Telecommunications Cables Data and telecommunication interfaces are classified according to their safety status.

The following table lists the status of several standard interfaces. If the status of a given port differs from the standard one, a notice will be given in the manual.

Note that this is a general list; it does not imply that LA-110 has all these ports.

Ports Safety Status

V.11, V.28, V.35, V.36, X.21, RS-530, X.21, 10 BaseT, 100 BaseT, Unbalanced E1, E2, E3, STM, DS-2, DS-3, S-Interface ISDN, Analog voice E&M

SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage:

Ports which do not present a safety hazard. Usually up to 30 VAC or 60 VDC.

xDSL (without feeding voltage), Balanced E1, T1, Sub E1/T1

TNV-1 Telecommunication Network Voltage-1:

Ports whose normal operating voltage is within the limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from telecommunications networks are possible.

FXS (Foreign Exchange Subscriber) TNV-2 Telecommunication Network Voltage-2:

Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are not possible. These ports are not permitted to be directly connected to external telephone and data lines.

FXO (Foreign Exchange Office), xDSL (with feeding voltage), U-Interface ISDN

TNV-3 Telecommunication Network Voltage-3:

Ports whose normal operating voltage exceeds the limits of SELV (usually up to 120 VDC or telephone ringing voltages), on which overvoltages from telecommunication networks are possible.

Always connect a given port to a port of the same safety status. If in doubt, seek the assistance of a qualified safety engineer.

Always make sure that the equipment is grounded before connecting telecommunication cables. Do not disconnect the ground connection before disconnecting all telecommunications cables.

Some SELV and non-SELV circuits use the same connectors. Use caution when connecting cables. Extra caution should be exercised during thunderstorms.

When using shielded or coaxial cables, verify that there is a good ground connection at both ends. The earthing and bonding of the ground connections should comply with the local codes.

The telecommunication wiring in the building may be damaged or present a fire hazard in case of contact between exposed external wires and the AC power lines. In order to reduce the risk, there are restrictions on the diameter of wires in the telecom cables, between the equipment and the mating connectors.

To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cords.

Pour réduire les risques s’incendie, utiliser seulement des conducteurs de télécommunications 26 AWG ou de section supérieure.

Some ports are suitable for connection to intra-building or non-exposed wiring or cabling only. In such cases, a notice will be given in the installation instructions.

Do not attempt to tamper with any carrier-provided equipment or connection hardware.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) The equipment is designed and approved to comply with the electromagnetic regulations of major regulatory bodies. The following instructions may enhance the performance of the equipment and will provide better protection against excessive emission and better immunity against disturbances.

A good earth connection is essential. When installing the equipment in a rack, make sure to remove all traces of paint from the mounting points. Use suitable lock-washers and torque. If an external grounding lug is provided, connect it to the earth bus using braided wire as short as possible.

The equipment is designed to comply with EMC requirements when connecting it with unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cables. However, the use of shielded wires is always recommended, especially for high-rate data. In some cases, when unshielded wires are used, ferrite cores should be installed on certain cables. In such cases, special instructions are provided in the manual.

Disconnect all wires which are not in permanent use, such as cables used for one-time configuration.

The compliance of the equipment with the regulations for conducted emission on the data lines is dependent on the cable quality. The emission is tested for UTP with 80 dB longitudinal conversion loss (LCL).

Unless otherwise specified or described in the manual, TNV-1 and TNV-3 ports provide secondary protection against surges on the data lines. Primary protectors should be provided in the building installation.

The equipment is designed to provide adequate protection against electro-static discharge (ESD). However, it is good working practice to use caution when connecting cables terminated with plastic connectors (without a grounded metal hood, such as flat cables) to sensitive data lines. Before connecting such cables, discharge yourself by touching earth ground or wear an ESD preventive wrist strap.

FCC-15 User Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Installation and Operation manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Caution

Attention

Canadian Emission Requirements This Class A digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulation.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

Warning per EN 55022 (CISPR-22)

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures.

Cet appareil est un appareil de Classe A. Dans un environnement résidentiel, cet appareil peut provoquer des brouillages radioélectriques. Dans ces cas, il peut être demandé à l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures appropriées.

Dieses ist ein Gerät der Funkstörgrenzwertklasse A. In Wohnbereichen können bei Betrieb dieses Gerätes Rundfunkströrungen auftreten, in welchen Fällen der Benutzer für entsprechende Gegenmaßnahmen verantwortlich ist.

Warning

Avertissement

Achtung

Preface

Foreword

This manual describes the technical characteristics, applications, installation and operation of LA-110.

Manual Organization This manual is organized as follows:

Chapter 1. Introduction presents the main features and describes the various equipment versions, and lists the technical characteristics of LA-110.

Chapter 2. Installation and Setup provides detailed installation and setup instructions for LA-110.

Chapter 3. Operation provides detailed instructions on front and rear panel indicators and managing LA-110 by means of a terminal.

Chapter 4. Configuring System Parameters provides detailed instructions on typical configuration procedures for system parameters.

Chapter 5. Connection Configuration provides detailed instructions on configuration procedures for network, data, user and Lan connections.

Chapter 6. Supervision Commands provides detailed instructions on Supervision commands.

Chapter 7. Control Commands

provides detailed instructions on Control commands.

Chapter 8. Display Options

provides detailed explanations on display options

Chapter 9. Tests and Diagnostics describes the diagnostic and performance monitoring functions supported by LA-110.

Appendix A. Connector Wiring provides connection data for the basic modules used in LA-110.

Conventions

A note draws attention to a general rule for a procedure, or to exceptions to a rule.

A caution warns of possible damage to the equipment if a procedure is not followed correctly.

A warning alerts to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the equipment. If these instructions are not followed exactly, possible bodily injury may occur.

Note

Caution

Warning

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual i

Contents

Chapter 1. Introduction 1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 1-1

General ................................................................................................................................1-1 Options ................................................................................................................................1-1 Applications..........................................................................................................................1-1 Features................................................................................................................................1-3

1.2 Physical Description..................................................................................................... 1-6 Unit Description ...................................................................................................................1-6

1.3 Functional Description................................................................................................. 1-7 General ................................................................................................................................1-7 Voice Modules......................................................................................................................1-7 Data Port Functions ..............................................................................................................1-8 Traffic Shaping......................................................................................................................1-8 Clock Source ........................................................................................................................1-8 Interfaces and Connections ...................................................................................................1-8 Network Interface.................................................................................................................1-9 Data Port..............................................................................................................................1-9 User Port ............................................................................................................................1-11 LAN Port ............................................................................................................................1-12 Timing................................................................................................................................1-12 Jitter Buffer .........................................................................................................................1-13 ATM CoS & Traffic Shaping.................................................................................................1-13 Router ................................................................................................................................1-14 Bridging..............................................................................................................................1-15 Echo Cancellation ...............................................................................................................1-16 Management and Configuration..........................................................................................1-16 Operations, Administration and Maintenance......................................................................1-16 Statistics Collection .............................................................................................................1-17 Configuration......................................................................................................................1-18 Updating Software ..............................................................................................................1-18 Tests and Diagnostics Capabilities .......................................................................................1-19 Loopback Tests ...................................................................................................................1-19 Alarms ................................................................................................................................1-20 LED Indicators ....................................................................................................................1-20

1.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................. 1-21 ATM Features .....................................................................................................................1-21 Network Interfaces..............................................................................................................1-22 User Interfaces....................................................................................................................1-22 General ..............................................................................................................................1-24

Chapter 2. Installation and Setup 2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites ............................................................................ 2-2 2.3 Package Contents ........................................................................................................ 2-2 2.4 Equipment Needed ..................................................................................................... 2-3

Table of Contents

ii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

2.5 Installation and Setup .................................................................................................. 2-3 Grounding ............................................................................................................................2-4 Setting of Module Jumpers and Switches ...............................................................................2-4

2.6 Connections ................................................................................................................ 2-5 E1 User Port .........................................................................................................................2-5 Data Port..............................................................................................................................2-6 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................2-6 Supervisory Port....................................................................................................................2-6 Control Port..........................................................................................................................2-7 Power...................................................................................................................................2-7

Chapter 3. Operation 3.1 Front Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators.......................................................... 3-1 3.2 Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session..................................................... 3-2

CONTROL Port ....................................................................................................................3-3 Initial Configuration Procedure..............................................................................................3-3 Turning on LA-110................................................................................................................3-4

3.3 Operating Instructions ................................................................................................. 3-4 Normal Indications ...............................................................................................................3-5 Turning Off...........................................................................................................................3-5

3.4 Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session ................................................. 3-5 Starting a Control Session......................................................................................................3-5 Login Password.....................................................................................................................3-5 Navigating the Terminal Screen.............................................................................................3-7

3.5 Management Activities................................................................................................. 3-8 3.6 Configuration procedure.............................................................................................. 3-9 3.7 General Parameters ................................................................................................... 3-11

DEF TERM SET ...................................................................................................................3-11 DEF PASSWORD................................................................................................................3-12 DEF CLOCK .......................................................................................................................3-13 DEF NAME .........................................................................................................................3-14 DEF DATE ..........................................................................................................................3-14 DEF TIME ...........................................................................................................................3-15

Chapter 4. Configuring System Parameters 4.1 Configuration of System Parameters............................................................................. 4-1

DEF SYSPARAMS..................................................................................................................4-1 4.2 Configuring Ports ......................................................................................................... 4-8

General ................................................................................................................................4-8 DEF NETWORK....................................................................................................................4-8 DEF DATA..........................................................................................................................4-13 DEF USER...........................................................................................................................4-16 Def LAN .............................................................................................................................4-20 DEF SP PORT .....................................................................................................................4-24

Chapter 5. Connection Configuration 5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 5-1

Plug-and-play .......................................................................................................................5-1 General Procedure................................................................................................................5-1

Table of Contents

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual iii

5.2 Configuring Port Connections ...................................................................................... 5-3 General ................................................................................................................................5-3 ADD CONN DATA...............................................................................................................5-4 DEL CONN DATA ..............................................................................................................5-13 ADD CONN USER .............................................................................................................5-15 DEL CONN USER...............................................................................................................5-28 ADD CONN LAN ...............................................................................................................5-29 DEL CONN LAN.................................................................................................................5-37

Chapter 6. Supervision Commands 6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 6-1

General Configuration Commands ........................................................................................6-1 Supervision Commands ........................................................................................................6-2 Control Commands...............................................................................................................6-3

6.2 Port Connections ......................................................................................................... 6-4 ACTIVATE CONN DATA.......................................................................................................6-4 ACTIVATE CONN USER .......................................................................................................6-4 MOD CONN DATA .............................................................................................................6-5 MODIFY CONN NETWORK.................................................................................................6-5 MODIFY CONN USER..........................................................................................................6-6 ACTIVATE CONN LAN.........................................................................................................6-6 MOD CONN LAN................................................................................................................6-7

6.3 Bundles ....................................................................................................................... 6-7 ADD BUNDLE......................................................................................................................6-7 DEL BUNDLE .......................................................................................................................6-9

6.4 Network Management Station (NMS)......................................................................... 6-10 ADD NMS..........................................................................................................................6-10 MOD NMS.........................................................................................................................6-11 DEL NMS ...........................................................................................................................6-12

6.5 Static MAC Address ................................................................................................... 6-13 ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN...........................................................................................6-13 DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN ............................................................................................6-13

6.6 Static Routing ............................................................................................................ 6-14 ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN .............................................................................................6-14 DEL STATIC ROUTING DATA ............................................................................................6-15

6.7 ATM Address ............................................................................................................. 6-16 DEF ADDR ATM.................................................................................................................6-16 DEF ADDR ILMI .................................................................................................................6-17

6.8 Community ............................................................................................................... 6-18 DEF COMMUNITY .............................................................................................................6-18

6.9 Default Gateway........................................................................................................ 6-19 DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN...........................................................................................6-19

6.10 Loopback Tests .......................................................................................................... 6-20 SEND LOOPBACK DATA....................................................................................................6-20

6.11 Printing...................................................................................................................... 6-20 ACTIVATE ELCP..................................................................................................................6-20

6.12 File Transfer............................................................................................................... 6-21 ACTIVATE TFTP..................................................................................................................6-21

6.13 Terminal .................................................................................................................... 6-22 DEF TERM RESET ...............................................................................................................6-22

Table of Contents

iv LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6.14 PAT ........................................................................................................................... 6-22 ADD PAT ...........................................................................................................................6-22 DEL PAT.............................................................................................................................6-24

6.15 NAT........................................................................................................................... 6-24 ADD NAT...........................................................................................................................6-24 DEL NAT ............................................................................................................................6-25

6.16 DHCP........................................................................................................................ 6-26 ADD DHCP........................................................................................................................6-26 DEL DHCP .........................................................................................................................6-27 DEF PSTN...........................................................................................................................6-27

Chapter 7. Control Commands 7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2 Commands .................................................................................................................. 7-1

CLR ALM..............................................................................................................................7-1 CLR PM................................................................................................................................7-1 EXIT......................................................................................................................................7-2 HELP....................................................................................................................................7-2 INIT DB................................................................................................................................7-3 LOOP...................................................................................................................................7-3 CLR LOOP ...........................................................................................................................7-3 RESET...................................................................................................................................7-4 DEL SYSERR .........................................................................................................................7-4

Chapter 8. Display Options 8.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.2 List of Commands........................................................................................................ 8-1 8.3 Display Commands...................................................................................................... 8-3

DSP ADDR ATM...................................................................................................................8-3 DSP ADDR ILMI ...................................................................................................................8-4 DSP ALM..............................................................................................................................8-4 DSP ARP TABLE LAN............................................................................................................8-5 DSP BUNDLE.......................................................................................................................8-6 DSP COMMUNITY...............................................................................................................8-7 DSP CONN DATA................................................................................................................8-7 DSP CONN LAN ..................................................................................................................8-8 DSP CONN USER.................................................................................................................8-9 DSP DATA..........................................................................................................................8-11 DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN...........................................................................................8-11 DSP DHCP.........................................................................................................................8-12 DSP LAN ............................................................................................................................8-13 DSP MAC ADDR LAN ........................................................................................................8-15 DSP NAT............................................................................................................................8-15 DSP NETWORK..................................................................................................................8-16 DSP NMS ...........................................................................................................................8-16 DSP PAT.............................................................................................................................8-17 DSP PM ATM .....................................................................................................................8-18 DSP PM CONN DATA........................................................................................................8-19 DSP PM CONN AAL2.........................................................................................................8-21 DSP PM CONN LAN ..........................................................................................................8-23 DSP PM CONN OAM DATA ..............................................................................................8-24

Table of Contents

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual v

DSP PM CONN OAM LAN.................................................................................................8-28 DSP PM CONN OAM USER ...............................................................................................8-31 DSP PM IP..........................................................................................................................8-37 DSP PM NETWORK ...........................................................................................................8-37 DSP PM LAN......................................................................................................................8-43 DSP PM OAM ....................................................................................................................8-44 DSP PM OAM STATUS.......................................................................................................8-45 DSP PM USER ....................................................................................................................8-46 DSP PSTN ..........................................................................................................................8-50 DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN................................................................................................8-52 DSP SP PORT.....................................................................................................................8-53 DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN ............................................................................................8-53 DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN...............................................................................................8-54 DSP SYS .............................................................................................................................8-55 DSP SYSERR .......................................................................................................................8-56 DSP SYSPARAMS................................................................................................................8-57 DSP USER ..........................................................................................................................8-59 PING..................................................................................................................................8-60

Chapter 9. Troubleshooting and Diagnostics 9.1 Front Panel Indicators and Switches............................................................................. 9-1 9.2 Alarms ......................................................................................................................... 9-1

DSP ALM..............................................................................................................................9-1 CLR ALM..............................................................................................................................9-2 Alarms List ............................................................................................................................9-2

9.3 Diagnostic Tests ........................................................................................................... 9-5 LOOPBACK Functions ..........................................................................................................9-5 REMOTE NETWORK Loopback ............................................................................................9-6 LOCAL DATA Loopback .......................................................................................................9-6 LOCAL USER Loopback........................................................................................................9-7

9.4 Loopbacks through the Supervision Terminal ............................................................... 9-8 Loopback Control .................................................................................................................9-8 LOOP...................................................................................................................................9-8 CLR LOOP ...........................................................................................................................9-8

9.5 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 9-9

Appendix A. Connector Wiring

Table of Contents

vi LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

List of Figures 1-1. LA-110 IAD Application ........................................................................................................ 1-2 1-2. LA-110 Dedicated Data Services Application using AAL1 ...................................................... 1-3 1-3. LA-110 General View............................................................................................................ 1-6 1-4. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel .................................................................................................... 1-6 1-5. LA-110 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 1-7 1-6. LA-110 Interface Configurations ............................................................................................ 1-8 1-7. LA-110 Typical Rear Panel – ISDN Configuration .................................................................. 1-9 1-8. Network and User Interfaces ............................................................................................... 1-11 2-1. LA-110 Rear Panel – ISDN with Optional Data Port .............................................................. 2-3 2-2. LA-110 Rear Panel – FXS ....................................................................................................... 2-3 2-3. E1 Jumper Locations.............................................................................................................. 2-5 2-4. LA-110 Rear Panel – Unbalanced Interface ........................................................................... 2-6 2-5. Power Supply Connector....................................................................................................... 2-7 2-6. External Power Supply Pin Assignment .................................................................................. 2-7 3-1. LA-110 Front Panel ............................................................................................................... 3-1 3-2. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel .................................................................................................... 3-2 3-3. Password Prompt................................................................................................................... 3-6 3-4. Illegal Password Message ....................................................................................................... 3-6 3-5. Superuser Mode.................................................................................................................... 3-6 3-6. User Mode ............................................................................................................................ 3-7 3-7. Typical LA-110 Terminal Screen............................................................................................ 3-9 3-8. LA-110 Configuration Procedures........................................................................................ 3-10 3-9. DEF TERM SET .................................................................................................................... 3-12 3-10. DEF TERM SET – Other ..................................................................................................... 3-12 3-11. DEF PASSWORD .............................................................................................................. 3-13 3-12. DEF CLOCK – Adaptive Clock........................................................................................... 3-14 3-13. DEF CLOCK – Derived from the Main Link ....................................................................... 3-14 3-14. DEF NAME........................................................................................................................ 3-14 3-15. DEF DATE ......................................................................................................................... 3-15 3-16. DEF TIME.......................................................................................................................... 3-15 4-1. Changing Coding Law – Confirmation ................................................................................... 4-2 4-2. DEF SYSPARAMS – Continued .............................................................................................. 4-2 4-3. Message to Change Adaptation Layer .................................................................................... 4-2 4-4. Adaptation Layer Changed Successfully ................................................................................. 4-2 4-5. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2 – PSTN for POTS & DSSI for ISDN (with ELCP).............................. 4-4 4-6. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2 – CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN ................................................. 4-5 4-7. Message to Change Application ID ........................................................................................ 4-5 4-8. Application ID Changed Successfully ..................................................................................... 4-5 4-9. DEF NETWORK – ADSL........................................................................................................ 4-9 4-10. Network Port Configuration - G.SHDSL Uplink ................................................................. 4-11 4-11. DEF DATA – Frame Relay.................................................................................................. 4-13

Table of Contents

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual vii

4-12. DEF DATA - AAL1 Stream ................................................................................................. 4-15 4-13. DEF USER – FXS................................................................................................................ 4-16 4-14. DEF USER – FXS – Message ............................................................................................... 4-16 4-15. DEF USER – ISDN ............................................................................................................. 4-17 4-16. DEF USER – ISDN – Message ............................................................................................ 4-17 4-17. DEF USER – E1.................................................................................................................. 4-18 4-18. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Bridge Mode .......................................................... 4-20 4-19. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Router Mode .......................................................... 4-22 4-20. DEF SP PORT.................................................................................................................... 4-24 5-1. LA-110 Connections Configuration........................................................................................ 5-2 5-2. Adding Connections Procedures............................................................................................ 5-4 5-3. ADD CONN DATA– Frame Relay ......................................................................................... 5-5 5-4. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode ...................................................................................... 5-6 5-5. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode – Cont. .......................................................................... 5-7 5-6. ADD CONN DATA – VBR..................................................................................................... 5-9 5-7. ADD CONN DATA – CBR................................................................................................... 5-10 5-8. ADD CONN DATA – Network Mode.................................................................................. 5-10 5-9. ADD CONN DATA – Network Mode–Cont......................................................................... 5-11 5-10. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Mode ......................................................................... 5-12 5-11. DEL CONN DATA............................................................................................................. 5-14 5-12. DEL CONN – Network Mode............................................................................................ 5-14 5-13. DEL CONN – Service ........................................................................................................ 5-14 5-14. DEL CONN –AAL1............................................................................................................ 5-15 5-15. ADD CONN USER – FXS .................................................................................................. 5-16 5-16. ADD CONN USER – ISDN................................................................................................ 5-18 5-17. Connection Was Added Successfully Message ................................................................... 5-19 5-18. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – CES .............................................................................. 5-21 5-19. ADD CONN USER- E1 - AAL1 – Connection DB-CES ....................................................... 5-24 5-20. Idle Signaling Bits – Other ................................................................................................. 5-25 5-21. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection Transparent ............................................... 5-25 5-22. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL2 ........................................................................................ 5-26 5-23. DEL CONN USER – ISDN ................................................................................................. 5-28 5-24. DEL CONN USER – E1/FXS ............................................................................................... 5-29 5-25. ADD CONN LAN.............................................................................................................. 5-29 5-26. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge Mode – VBR.............................................................. 5-32 5-27. ADD CONN LAN– Ethernet Router Mode......................................................................... 5-33 5-28. DEL CONN LAN – Router ................................................................................................. 5-37 5-29. DEL CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge.................................................................................... 5-37 6-1. ACTIVATE CONN – DATA .................................................................................................... 6-4 6-2. ACTIVATE CONN – USER..................................................................................................... 6-5 6-3. Activate Conn LAN – Index ................................................................................................... 6-6 6-4. ACTIVATE CONN LAN.......................................................................................................... 6-6 6-5. MOD CONN LAN................................................................................................................. 6-7 6-6. ADD BUNDLE – E1............................................................................................................... 6-8 6-7. DEL BUNDLE........................................................................................................................ 6-9 6-8. DEL BUNDLE – Transmit and Receive Timeslots ................................................................... 6-9 6-9. DEL BUNDLE – Connection Is Using The Bundle ................................................................ 6-10

Table of Contents

viii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-10. DEL BUNDLE – Connection and Bundle Number Deletion Message ................................. 6-10 6-11. ADD NMS......................................................................................................................... 6-10 6-12. MOD NMS – Index Number Message ............................................................................... 6-12 6-13. DEL NMS – Index Number Message.................................................................................. 6-12 6-14. ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN ......................................................................................... 6-13 6-15. DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN.......................................................................................... 6-14 6-16. ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN............................................................................................ 6-14 6-17. DELETE STATIC ROUTING LAN....................................................................................... 6-15 6-18. DEF ADDR ATM – Management ....................................................................................... 6-16 6-19. DEF ADDR ILMI................................................................................................................ 6-17 6-20. DEF COMMUNITY............................................................................................................ 6-18 6-21. DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY ................................................................................................. 6-19 6-22. SEND LOOPBACK DATA .................................................................................................. 6-20 6-23. ACTIVATE ELCP ................................................................................................................ 6-21 6-24. ACTIVATE TFTP ................................................................................................................ 6-22 6-25. ADD PAT .......................................................................................................................... 6-23 6-26. ADD NAT ......................................................................................................................... 6-25 6-27. DEL NAT........................................................................................................................... 6-26 6-28. ADD DHCP ...................................................................................................................... 6-26 6-29. DEL DHCP........................................................................................................................ 6-27 6-30. DEF PSTN Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 6-28 6-31. Duration Dialog Box.......................................................................................................... 6-29 6-32. Rate Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 6-29 6-33. Attenuation Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 6-29 6-34. Pulse Duration Dialog Box................................................................................................. 6-30 6-35. Cadence Ring Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 6-31 6-36. Digit Parameters Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 6-31 7-1. LOOP ................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7-2. DEL SYSERR .......................................................................................................................... 7-4 8-1. DSP ADDR ATM ................................................................................................................... 8-3 8-2. DSP ADDR ILMI.................................................................................................................... 8-4 8-3. DSP ALM .............................................................................................................................. 8-5 8-4. DSP ARP TABLE LAN ............................................................................................................ 8-5 8-5. DSP BUNDLE........................................................................................................................ 8-6 8-6. Displaying All Bundles ........................................................................................................... 8-6 8-7. Displaying an Individual Bundle ............................................................................................ 8-7 8-8. DSP COMMUNITY ............................................................................................................... 8-7 8-9. DSP CON DATA – AAL1 Stream Application Mode............................................................... 8-8 8-10. DSP CONN LAN................................................................................................................. 8-9 8-11. DSP CONN USER ............................................................................................................. 8-10 8-12. DSP DATA – AAL1 ............................................................................................................ 8-11 8-13. DSP DATA – Frame Relay ................................................................................................. 8-11 8-14. DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN ......................................................................................... 8-12 8-15. DSP DHCP – Pools............................................................................................................ 8-12 8-16. DSP DHCP – Allocation Table ........................................................................................... 8-13 8-17. DSP LAN – Ethernet Bridge ............................................................................................... 8-14 8-18. DSP LAN – Ethernet Router............................................................................................... 8-14

Table of Contents

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual ix

8-19. DSP MAC ADDR LAN....................................................................................................... 8-15 8-20. DSP NAT........................................................................................................................... 8-15 8-21. DSP NETWORK ................................................................................................................ 8-16 8-22. DSP NMS.......................................................................................................................... 8-17 8-23. DSP PAT ........................................................................................................................... 8-17 8-24. DSP PM ATM.................................................................................................................... 8-18 8-25. DSP PM CONN DATA – AAL1 .......................................................................................... 8-20 8-26. DSP PM CONN AAL2 ....................................................................................................... 8-22 8-27. DSP PM CONN LAN......................................................................................................... 8-23 8-28. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA – Frame Relay...................................................................... 8-25 8-29. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA – AAL1 Stream..................................................................... 8-26 8-30. DSP PM CONN OAM LAN ............................................................................................... 8-29 8-31. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – ISDN – D Channel............................................................. 8-32 8-32. Connection OAM Statistics – B1 Channel .......................................................................... 8-33 8-33. Connection OAM Statistics – B2 Channel .......................................................................... 8-34 8-34. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – FXS .................................................................................... 8-35 8-35. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – E1...................................................................................... 8-36 8-36. DSP PM IP ........................................................................................................................ 8-37 8-37. DSP PM NETWORK – ADSL ............................................................................................. 8-38 8-38. DSP PM NETWORK – SHDSL ........................................................................................... 8-39 8-39. DSP PM NETWORK f – ADSL ........................................................................................... 8-40 8-40. DSP PM NETWORK f – SHDSL ......................................................................................... 8-41 8-41. DSP PM LAN..................................................................................................................... 8-43 8-42. DSP PM OAM................................................................................................................... 8-45 8-43. DSP PM OAM STATUS ..................................................................................................... 8-46 8-44. DSP PM USER – ISDN....................................................................................................... 8-47 8-45. DSP PM USER – ISDN – Continued................................................................................... 8-48 8-46. DSP PM USER – E1 ........................................................................................................... 8-48 8-47. DSP PM USER f – for E1 .................................................................................................... 8-49 8-48. DSP PM USER – FXS ......................................................................................................... 8-50 8-49. DSP PSTN ......................................................................................................................... 8-51 8-50. DSP PSTN – Continued ..................................................................................................... 8-52 8-51. DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN .............................................................................................. 8-53 8-52. DSP SP PORT.................................................................................................................... 8-53 8-53. DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN .......................................................................................... 8-54 8-54. DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN ............................................................................................. 8-54 8-55. DSP SYS ............................................................................................................................ 8-55 8-56. DSP SYSPARAMS .............................................................................................................. 8-58 8-57. DSP USER – ISDN............................................................................................................. 8-59 8-58. DSP USER – E1 ................................................................................................................. 8-59 8-59. DSP USER – FXS................................................................................................................ 8-60 8-60. PING................................................................................................................................. 8-60 9-1. Remote Network Loopback................................................................................................... 9-6 9-2. Local Data Port Loopback ..................................................................................................... 9-7 9-3. Local User Loopback............................................................................................................. 9-7 9-4. Loopback Selection Screen.................................................................................................... 9-8

Table of Contents

x LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

List of Tables 1-1. LA-110 Stored Data for Statistics.......................................................................................... 1-18 2-1. DTE Interfaces and Matching Connector Cables .................................................................... 2-3 3-1. LA-110 Controls, Connectors and Indicators– Front Panel ..................................................... 3-1 3-2. LA-110 Controls and Connectors – Rear Panel ...................................................................... 3-2 4-1. Sysparams Parameters ........................................................................................................... 4-6 4-2. DEF NETWORK – ADSL........................................................................................................ 4-9 4-3. DEF NETWORK – G.SHDSL Parameters.............................................................................. 4-11 4-4. DEF DATA – Frame Relay.................................................................................................... 4-14 4-5. DEF DATA - AAL1 Stream ................................................................................................... 4-15 4-6. DEF USER – FXS.................................................................................................................. 4-17 4-7. Configuration of User Port with ISDN.................................................................................. 4-18 4-8. Configuration of User Port for E1 Module............................................................................ 4-19 4-9. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Bridge Mode ............................................................ 4-21 4-10. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Router Mode .......................................................... 4-22 4-11. DEF SP PORT.................................................................................................................... 4-24 5-1. ADD CONN DATA – Frame Relay ........................................................................................ 5-5 5-2. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode ...................................................................................... 5-7 5-3. ADD CONN DATA – VBR.................................................................................................... 5-10 5-4. ADD CONN DATA – Network Mode.................................................................................. 5-11 5-5. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Mode ........................................................................... 5-13 5-6. ADD CONN USER – FXS .................................................................................................... 5-17 5-7. ADD CONN USER – ISDN.................................................................................................. 5-19 5-8. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection CES ............................................................. 5-21 5-9. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection DB-CES ....................................................... 5-24 5-10. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL2 ........................................................................................ 5-27 5-11. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge Mode ........................................................................ 5-30 5-12. ADD CONN LAN – Traffic Control.................................................................................... 5-32 5-13. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Router Mode........................................................................ 5-34 6-1. LA-110 General Configuration Commands ............................................................................ 6-1 6-2. LA-110 Supervision Commands............................................................................................. 6-2 6-3. LA-110 Control Commands................................................................................................... 6-3 6-4. ADD NMS........................................................................................................................... 6-11 6-5. ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN............................................................................................. 6-15 6-6. DEF ADDR ATM – Management ......................................................................................... 6-16 6-7. DEF ADDR ILMI.................................................................................................................. 6-17 6-8. DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY ................................................................................................... 6-19 6-9. ADD PAT ............................................................................................................................ 6-23 6-10. ADD NAT ......................................................................................................................... 6-25 6-11. PSTN Parameters............................................................................................................... 6-32

Table of Contents

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual xi

8-1. LA-110 Commands ............................................................................................................... 8-1 8-2. DSP PM ATM...................................................................................................................... 8-19 8-3. DSP PM CONN DATA ........................................................................................................ 8-21 8-4. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA............................................................................................... 8-27 8-5. DSP PM CONN OAM LAN ................................................................................................. 8-30 8-6. DSP PM NETWORK............................................................................................................ 8-42 8-7. DSP PM LAN....................................................................................................................... 8-44 8-8. DSP PM OAM..................................................................................................................... 8-45 8-9. DSP SYS .............................................................................................................................. 8-56 9-1. LA-110 Alarms Buffer Messages ............................................................................................. 9-3 9-2. Troubleshooting Chart ........................................................................................................... 9-9

Table of Contents

xii LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

Overview 1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Overview

General LA-110 is an advanced ATM Integrated Access Device (IAD) that provides multiservice connectivity to ATM network over xDSL lines.

LA-110 enables service providers to offer analog voice, ISDN, data and LAN to small and medium size businesses over xDSL lines. LA-110 provides maximum flexibility for service integration, ease of use and scalability.

Options The LA-110 uplink port provides connectivity to the network over ADSL or SHDSL lines. Using the ATM Forum Loop Emulation Services (LES) standard, LA-110 is interoperable with LES-based Voice Gateways (VGW).

On the User side, LA-110 supports:

• 10/100 BaseT port

• Optional four analog voice or ISDN S0 channels

• Optional E1 port

• Optional data port.

Applications

VoDSL per LES

Figure 1-1 shows the LA-110apability to handle Voice over DSL per Loop Emulation Service (LES).

In this application, LA-110 is connected to several phones, ISDN or POTS, PBX and data equipment.

On the WAN side, the IAD device is connected to the ATM network via the DSLAM over xDSL lines. The connection to the DSLAM can be performed over SHDSL or ADSL.

The voice traffic, POTS or ISDN, is carried over AAL2. The use of AAL2 allows dynamic use of bandwidth. It also enables multiple voice circuits to be carried simultaneously.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-2 Overview

The voice traffic carried by the ATM cells is terminated on the V.5.2 Voice Gateway (VGW).

The data traffic, LAN or Frame Relay, is carried on AAL5, UBR, VBR or CBR through the ATM network. The data traffic is terminated at the Broadband Access Server (BAS). The BAS converts the ATM data streams into IP packets.

IP

ISDN

POTS

POTS

ISDN

ATM

ATM

ATMSHDSL

ATMADSL

PSTN

Internet

Public ATM

NetworkLAN

LAN LAN

ROUTER

DSLAM

ATM

PBXLA-110LA-110

LA-110

BAS

V.5.2

Voice Gateway

Figure 1-1. LA-110 IAD Application

Dedicated Data Services

Figure 1-2 shows the LA-110 capability to handle dedicated data connections – leased lines – over the ATM network.

In this application, the data is transferred transparently using AAL1; therefore only one connection can be defined on the port.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Overview 1-3

PBX

PBX

LAN

S.HSDL

E1

E1

S.HSDL

Public ATM

Network

NMS

LA-110

LAN

LA-110

LAN Switch

PBX

LAN

LANACE-101

ACE-101

Figure 1-2. LA-110 Dedicated Data Services Application using AAL1

Features

WAN Port

The LA-110 uplink supports several xDSL standards to provide extremely high bandwidth over the twisted pair that runs from the central office to the user office or home. These standards include ADSL and G.SHDSL. They enable LA-110 to work opposite a wide range of DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) or ATM switches.

Voice Channels and Data Ports

LA-110 includes a 10/100BaseT Ethernet User port, optional Data port (V.35/X.21), and in addition, a selection of either 4 ‘FXS’ ports, 4 ‘ISDN’ BRI ports, or an E1 port.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-4 Overview

Voice & Data Convergence

LA-110 offers voice and data convergence by using different methods for the transmission of voice and data. LA-110 provides support for voice applications by performing Constant Bit Rate (CBR) or Variable Bit Rate (VBR) transfer of information using AAL1 or AAL2. This facilitates the connection to analog phones, ISDN equipment, PBXs or other channeled E1/T1 devices.

The ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) provides the following services in the ATM transmission mode:

• Handling of transmission errors

• Segmentation and reassembly, to enable larger blocks of data to be carried in the information field of ATM cells

• Handling of lost and incorrectly inserted cell conditions

• Flow control and timing control.

The configuration of the Adaptation Layer is necessary in order to configure the voice and voice signaling transmission parameters.

LA-110 supports different Adaptation Layers:

• AAL1 (ATM Adaptation Layer Type 1) which supports Class A traffic for Constant Bit Rate applications, such as video, as well as voice-utilizing Circuit Emulation Service (CES 2.0) and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBCES) in structured mode.

• AAL2 (ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2), which supports Class B traffic, is connection-oriented, Constant Bit Rate (CBR), Variable Bit Rate (VBR), isochronous traffic requiring precise timing between source and sink for applications such as compressed voice and video. It is in accordance with the ATMF LES (Loop Emulation Service) standard – for transport of different voice channels on the same VC (Virtual Channel).

• AAL5 is for Data.

Traffic Shaping

LA-110 ensures reliable services and maximal utilization of the ATM uplink through traffic shaping. LA-110 traffic shaping offers per VC traffic shaping for improved QoS and utilization of the ATM uplink

Routing and Bridging

LA-110 includes a router or bridge between a LAN module and the ATM network. The router supports Routing Information Protocols (RIP I and RIP II) to measure the shortest path between two points on the network. This router also supports static routing for the selection of a route for data traffic on the basis of routing options preset by the network administration.

LA-110 supports IP routing and MAC bridging. It also supports NAT and allows the sharing of several IP addresses between various LAN users.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Overview 1-5

LA-110 supports DHCP, and allows the sharing of IP address pools between DHCP clients on the LAN.

The LAN module interface (10/100BaseT) is transparent to Point-To-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) to allow the user computer to connect to the Internet and enjoy most of the benefits of a direct connection. The LAN module interface also supports Point-to-Point Protocol over ATM (PPPoA) as per RFC-2364.

For greater flexibility, LA-110 supports different service types over ATM: Ethernet and IP in accordance with RFC-1483 (RFC-2864), RFC-1490 (RFC-2864), FR internetworking in accordance with FRF.5 and FRF.8.

Management

Various management interfaces are available, including inband and out-of-band (SNMP) management, Telnet, and local management via an ASCII terminal.

LA-110 is controlled via a supervisory port or an SNMP station. RADview management software is also available to support large networks. The unit supports ILMI (Interim Local Management Interface).

LA-110 also provides a dedicated Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for management, to be defined and programmed into the network routing logic, so all data transmitted between any two points across the network follows this pre-determined physical path, making use of a Virtual Circuit.

Plug & Play

This feature allows fast and easy installation of LA-110. The Plug & Play capability enables minimizing local configuration procedures, since all parameters can be downloaded remotely. Once LA-110 is installed and connected to its operating environment, the unit needs only to be turned on. It automatically receives its IP address, and all configuration procedures can be performed remotely.

Diagnostics and Statistics

LA-110 offers comprehensive diagnostics and statistics on all ports and network layers, enabling network control and fault localization.

The unit supports:

• Application layer statistics

• ATM layer statistics and control (OAM support)

• Physical layer diagnostics (loopback tests, statistics).

End-to-End QoS is measured using F5 OAM cells, including AIS, RDI, LB, CC and activation cells.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-6 Functional Description

1.2 Physical Description

Unit Description LA-110 is a compact unit, intended for installation on desktops or shelves. The unit height is 1U (1.75 in). Optional rack-mount adapter kits enable installation of one LA-110 in a 19-inch rack.

Figure 1-3. LA-110 General View

The LA-110 front panel includes three main LEDs that indicate its operating status.

The LA-110 rear panel includes:

• Network port – includes the uplink connection: SHDSL or ADSL port.

• User port – for voice data (POTS, ISDN or E1). The ISDN and POTS modules are Quad Voice cards that allow four channels of voice to be transmitted across the uplink interface.

• Data port – Connection of the user's equipment to the LA-110 Data port is made via X.21, RS-530, V.35, or V.36.

• 10/100BaseT LAN port

• DCE CONTROL connector (Data Communications Equipment) for unit control and administration from a terminal.

Figure 1-4. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-7

1.3 Functional Description

General This section provides a block diagram of LA-110 (Figure 1-5) and a description of its main functions.

The payload received through the User port is multiplexed into a single ATM trunk over the xDSL link. LA-110 supports ADSL and SHDSL uplinks.

Selection between POTS,ISDN, Channelized E1

V.35, V.36, X.21,RS-530

LANVoice User's Ports / Data

10/100BaseT

MUX

Router

Network Port

ADSL, SHDSL Figure 1-5. LA-110 Functional Block Diagram

Voice Modules LA-110 can support a voice module with 4 analog voice ports, 4 ISDN S0 ports or one E1 port. LA-110 provides support for voice applications by performing Constant Bit Rates (CBR) or Variable Bit Rates (VBR) using AAL1 or AAL2. This facilitates the connection to Analog phones, ISDN equipment, PBXs or other channelized E1/T1 devices.

LA-110 supports AAL1 for constant bit rate applications (video and voice) by utilizing Circuit Emulation Service (CES 2.0) and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBCES) in structure mode. LA-110 supports AAL2 in accordance with ATMF LES (Loop Emulation Service) for transport of different voice channels on the same VC.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-8 Functional Description

Data Port Functions LA-110 supports one data port. Serial interfaces include V.35, V.36, X.21 and RS-530. The LA-110 data port supports constant bit rate (CBR) using AAL1and unspecified bit rate (UBR) services using AAL5, and can perform IP traffic encapsulation in accordance with RFC 1490 (RFC 2684) and RFC 1483 (RFC 2684).

LA-110 supports both Frame Relay interworking protocols FRF.5 and FRF.8.

Traffic Shaping In addition, LA-110 performs traffic shaping of each connection of the user data port individually. The types of traffic shaping supported include UBR, VBR and CBR.

Clock Source The selectable clock source of LA-110 enables the use of clocks originating from the network. The network clock can be regenerated from the physical layer NTR (Network Timing Reference) or as an adaptive clock.

Interfaces and Connections Four ports are located in the LA-110 rear panel: Network, Data, LAN, and User. The Network port includes the uplink connections to the network. The User port is for voice and data transmission. The Data port is for data transmission.

LA-110 can be equipped with any of the following interfaces, creating several configurations. See Figure 1-6, and Figure 1-7.

• Network: Uplink - ADSL or SHDSL.

• User: one E1 port, 4 ISDN S0 or POTS (Plain Old telephone Service) interface, type 4 FXS

• Data: V.35, V.36, X.21, EIA-530.

LA-110 is also equipped with:

• LAN: 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN.

LAN

10/100BaseTEthernet

LAN

Network

ADSLSHDSL

Serial Data

User

E1POTSISDN

Data

V.35, V.36,X.21,

EIA-530,10/100BaseT

Figure 1-6. LA-110 Interface Configurations

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-9

Network Interface The LA-110 Network port provides an ATM user-network interface (UNI) in accordance with the ATM User Network Interface (UNI) Specification (Version 3.1).

xDSL Link

On the physical layer, LA-110 supports SHDSL and ADSL Physical Layer Specification.

The SHDSL interface supports TC-PAM line coding, and is in accordance with ITU-T G.991.2 and ETSI TS 101 524-1. The maximum symmetric debt allowed by the SHDSL equipment is 2312 kbps.

The ADSL interface supports DMT line coding, and is in accordance with ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A, B and ETSI ETR328. An RJ-45 (pins 4,5) connector is used for line connection. The data rates are:

• 8 Mbps (downstream)

• 1 Mbps (upstream).

The Network port is located on the back panel. A version of the Network port (SHDSL uplink) is shown in Figure 1-7.

Figure 1-7. LA-110 Typical Rear Panel – ISDN Configuration

Data Port The Data port is located on the back panel (see Figure 1-7). The LA-110 synchronous Data port supports the ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5) and Layer 1 (AAL1). It can be provided in one of the two following user-selectable application modes:

• Frame Relay

• AAL1 Stream.

LA-110 synchronous Data port can be ordered with one of the following interfaces:

• V.35 interface: 34-pin female connector via adapter cable

• V.36/RS-449 interface: 37-pin female connector via adapter cable

• X.21 interface: 15-pin D-type female connector via adapter cable

• RS-530/RS-422 interface: 25-pin D-type female connector.

The Data port has DCE interfaces and, accordingly, DCE timing. The LA-110 port provides transmit and receive clock signals to the equipment connected to the data port.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-10 Functional Description

Data Port in Frame Relay Mode

LA-110 provides connectivity to Frame Relay equipment such as routers. Both encapsulation and translation services are provided, as well as Service Interworking (FRF.8) and Network Interworking (FRF.5).

The bit rate of this port can be N x 64 Kbps, with values: 64, 128, 192, 256, 384, 448, 512, 768, 896, 1024, 1344, 1536, 1792 and 2048 Kbps.

The number of supported DLCIs (Data Link Connection Identifier) on each Frame Relay port is 32. The DLCI range is 16 through 991.

The LA-110 Frame Relay supports the following abilities:

• FECN

Ignore the FECN bit derived from the FRAME RELAY and set the EFCI bit to 0.

Convert – In the receive path the EFCI/CI bit is derived from the received FECN bit.

• DE ⇔ CLP – Specifies the method used to derive the cell loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent in the ATM network cells, from the DE bit of Frame Relay frames. The available selections are as follows:

CLP=0 – The CLP bit is always set to 0.

CLP=1 – The CLP bit is always set to 1.

Convert – The CLP bit is derived from the DE bit received from the frame relay equipment connected to LA-110.

In any case, the original DE bit is also mapped to the DE-FR-SSCS bit in the Frame Relay service-specific convergence sublayer (SSCS). Protocol data units (PDUs) are sent through the ATM network.

• Mode: Specifies the protocol handling method: Translation – Converting the encapsulation header from RFC 1490 (RFC 2684) FR to RFC 1483 (RFC 2684) ATM. Transparent – Transparently transfers the encapsulation header.

• Many-to-One: In Networking mode, it is possible to work with many-to-one connections. Maximal number of many-to-one connections is 32.

• Protocol – the following protocols are available: none, Q.933 network, Q.933 user, Q.933 both, T1.617 network, T1.617 user, T1.617 both, LMI network, LMI user, LMI both.

• CRC – Specifies the CRC polynomial to be used for error detection. The available selections are 16 BIT (CRC - 16) and 32 BIT (CRC – 32).

Data Port in AAL1 Stream Mode

In this application, the data is transferred transparently using AAL1; therefore, only one connection can be defined on the port. LA-110 supports the LSCES standard. The data rate is n×64 from 64, … , 2048 kbps.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-11

User Port LA-110 includes one User interface. It can include an E1 port, four modular analog or four ISDN S0 voice channels (see Figure 1-7).

ADSLSHDSLUplink

Network

10/100BaseT

Ethernet

LAN

Power

MPC860ESAR

(MPOA Client)

DCE / ControlPort

Rear Panel NetworkInterface

LANInterface

LA-110

DataPort

Front Panel

TerminalE1/ISDN

FXSData & Voice

Ports

PCM(Pulse CodeModulation)

Echo Cancellation

UserInterface

Figure 1-8. Network and User Interfaces

User E1 Port

LA-110 can include one User E1 port. This is a TDM port that can be divided into several bundles, with up to 30 connections for E1. Each bundle contains several timeslots. LA-110 can run one of the following applications on each bundle:

• Circuit Emulation Service (CES 2.0) or Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation CES (DBCES). These applications use AAL1. The CES provided ATM connectivity to voice or data such as video or PBX. The User port supports VCs both with and without signaling. Up to 31 channels can be transported in Structured Data Transfer (SDT) AAL1 mode. Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) AAL1 mode is not supported due to bandwidth constraints, however, it will be supported in later versions.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-12 Functional Description

• LA-110 provides ATM connectivity to voice using Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation Circuit Emulation Service (DBCES). The DBCES recognizes the activity of voice channels by their CAS signaling bits and frees or allocates them bandwidth accordingly.

ISDN Port

LA-110 can include an ISDN module for voice or data transmission (see Figure 1-7). It supports four S0 channels. The bearers’ payload is transported to the ATM network using AAL2 on a single VC in accordance with ATMF LES standard. The D channels are transported transparently to the Voice Gateway at the other end of the ATM network.

FXS Port

LA-110 can include a POTS module for voice transmission (see Figure 1-7). It supports four voice ports, providing scalability of 4 channels.

LA-110 provides ATM connectivity to voice using AAL2, thus allowing several voice connections to share the same VC. LA-110 supports G.711 (64kbps) voice coding. The signaling is performed in accordance with EIA-464 loop start/wink start.

The voice ports are Plain Old Telephone Service FXS type 4 channels.

FXS - Foreign eXchange Station. This channel is a service that can be ordered from the telephone company that provides local telephone service from a central office that is outside the subscriber’s exchange area. This type of connection is provided by a foreign exchange (FX) trunk.

The supported protocol between the IAD and the voice gateway is ELCP, and the communication with the voice gateway is in accordance with ATM LES standard.

Class services are transparent to the LA-110.

LAN Port LA-110 includes a Fast Ethernet Controller (FEC) module, located in the LAN module for user data interface (see Figure 1-7). The Ethernet port has a 10/100BaseT Ethernet LAN port interface terminated in an RJ-45 connector. The interface is intended for direct connection to an Ethernet hub port, using a UTP cable wired point-to-point.

Timing LA-110 supports flexible timing modes to enable hierarchical timing distribution in the network. The LA-110 system timing, which also determines the transmit clock of the network interface, can be locked to the following sources:

• NTR: With SHDSL or ADSL interface, LA-110 can recover the clock from the 8 KHz NTR clock.

• Adaptive clock, where the clock is regenerated from the ATM cells arrival rate.

• The clock can be derived from the uplink and LA-110 locks the clock and supplies it to its interfaces. (This is not recommended).

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-13

The timing of the data ports is independently selected (DCE or DTE, in accordance with user's selection). The Ethernet port always uses the LA-110 system timing.

Jitter Buffer The ATM network introduces a delay that consists of two parameters:

• CTD – cell transfer delay. This parameter defines the transport time required to transport the cell within the ATM network.

• CDV – cell delay variation. This parameter defines the jitter or variation in the delay that might be experienced by any cell.

The reassembly process on the receive side of the ATM network needs a buffer in which the reassembled cell stream is stored before it is transmitted out the user interface. The size of the buffer should be large enough to accommodate the largest CDV present on a VC to prevent underflow and overflow, yet not so large as to induce excessive overall delay.

On the LA-110 you can configure the CDV size with values between 0 to 20 ms.

When you configure the CDV you also determine the extra delay introduced by the LA-110.

For example, if your network has 10 ms CDV, the LA-110 stores cells in a buffer until it has enough cells to “play out” for 5 ms (half the CDV size), thus causing an extra delay of 5 ms.

This parameter is global for the LA-110 (i.e. all VC’s share the same CDV).

There is no alarm indicating jitter buffer overflow or underflow; therefore, it will be detected as data errors.

Implementation

The jitter buffer buffers the data received from the network before it is passed on to the user. Proper buffer size – according to the channels data bandwidth – is allocated. At this point the buffer is filled to half its size. Transmission to the user begins only after cells designated for the data channel are received from the network.

If the buffer overruns (fills up) or underruns (empties down) the data in the buffer is flushed and the buffer is filled to half its size again.

ATM CoS & Traffic Shaping

ATM CoS

LA-110 provides three ATM CoS (Class of Service) priority levels, as follows:

• CBR VCCs.

• VBR VCCs

• UBR VCCs.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-14 Functional Description

Traffic Shaping

LA-110 performs per VC traffic shaping of each connection on the User port. The types of traffic shaping supported include UBR, VBR and CBR.

CBR Traffic Shaping

For CBR Traffic Shaping, one parameter is required:

• PCR range: 10 to maximum line rate.

VBR Traffic Shaping

For VBR Traffic Shaping, three parameters are required:

• PCR range: Maximum line rate

• SCR range: 10 to maximum line rate

• MBS range: 1–999.

UBR Traffic Shaping

No traffic shaping. The PCR (Peak Cell Rate) is equal to the line rate and cannot be changed. Therefore no parameters are required for UBR Traffic Shaping.

Router LA-110 includes a router between a LAN and the ATM network. The router, with static or RIP routing protocols, records up to 80 learned networks or hosts, and learns the routings of data dynamically through a router table on up to eight VCCs on the ATM side and between VCCs.

The router provides connectivity between Ethernet Local Area Networks (LAN) and ATM networks using AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer and RFC 1483 encapsulation.

A router can be defined for one data port. The router of the Ethernet interface has a maximum of nine interfaces where one LAN sits on the Ethernet data port and eight WANs sit on eight VCCs, one on each VCC.

The router supports up to 32 static routing networks or stations towards the LAN interface and towards the WAN interface. A default gateway can be set on each interface. For a LAN interface, a next hop IP is needed. For the WAN interface, only the interface connection number is required.

The router supports unnumbered (without IP address) WAN interfaces for static routing to these interfaces. The LAN interface cannot be unnumbered; it must be set. The router supports fragmentation for each interface.

The router characteristics are summarized below:

• Can configure only one data port

• IP routing, using next hop

• Static routing, RIP1/2, is supported

• Ethernet ARP support

• Maximum 8 VCC per router (per data port)

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-15

• Each connection is treated like a logical port

• MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) can be configured per logical port

• Fragmentation can be configured per logical port

• Maximum 32 static routing entrees

• Aging time for the ARP table

• Responses to ping (ICMP) from every IP connection

• Management from every connection IP.

Bridging LA-110 supports multi-VCC on the Ethernet bridge. The bridge supports the RFC 1483 PDU with or without CRC. It can be configured per Ethernet port (with or without CRC). The interface includes a full-feature remote bridge, which operates at the physical and data link layers of the OSI model, and is therefore completely transparent to higher-level protocols, such as TCP/IP, DECnet, XNS, ISO, and to operating systems, such as Unix or Windows.

The bridge operates as a media access (MAC) layer remote bridge with self-learning capabilities. It learns and automatically recognizes the addresses of the nodes attached to the local LAN (the LAN directly attached to the LA-110 Ethernet interface), and uses this information to filter the LAN traffic.

When bridging is not necessary, the bridge can be set to Access only where frames received from the ATM side are transmitted to the LAN side without looking at the LAN table.

The bridge characteristics are summarized below:

• Can be configured on all data ports together

• Maximum eight VCCs per port

• Each VCC is treated like a logical port

• Learning bridge on each VCC

• Can bridge between two VCCs

• Supports static MAC address

• Supports aging time

• The agent can be managed from any VCC or from the Ethernet port.

The LAN module interface (10/100BaseT) is transparent to Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) to allow the user computer to connect to the Internet with a standard dial-up telephone line and a high-speed modem and enjoy most of the benefits of a direct connection. The LAN module interface also supports Point-to-Point Protocol over ATM (PPPoA) as per RFC-2364.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-16 Functional Description

Echo Cancellation LA-110 supports Echo Cancellation for analog and ISDN interfaces, for the isolation and filtering of unwanted signals caused by echoes from the user transmitted signal. This enables deletion of the echo tail that comes from the user side. Echo Cancellation in included as the default, for FXS User interface, and can be ordered for ISDN User interface.

LA-110 supports eight channels simultaneously. The supported echo tail is 4 ms or 16 ms. The LA-110 detects Fax/Modem calls and deactivates the EC (Exchange Carrier) operation.

Management and Configuration LA-110 enables local management and out-of-band initial configuration by means of an ASCII terminal. LA-110 provides access to configuration, diagnostics, performance and alarm monitoring through its supervisory port.

LA-110 has one serial supervisory port CONTROL in its back panel that operates in DCE (Data Communications Equipment) mode.

In addition to out-of-band management, the local LA-110 supports inband management as follows:

• Via the ATM network using the SNMP and ILMI protocols

• Via the Ethernet port using the SNMP protocol

• Via the Frame Relay port using SNMP over IP (RFC 1490).

Out-of-band SNMP is supported through the local RJ-45/RS-232 DCE port.

The LA-110 SNMP agent supports all the standard MIBs for E1, xDSL, Frame Relay, ATM DXI, CES and DBCES as well as the private MIBs of RAD.

Operations, Administration and Maintenance To ensure proper operations, administration and maintenance, LA-110 supports the following features:

• End-to-End OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) per I.610 interface

• Loopbacks (LB) tests

• Continuity check (CC)

• AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

• RDI (Remote Defect Indication) in an ATM network.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-17

Statistics Collection LA-110 collects performance-monitoring statistics at the physical and ATM layers for the network interface, and for each user port. It is also possible to display statistics data for individual connections (AAL1, AAL5).

The data port statistics are collected over 15 minute intervals, for up to 24 hours. The data collected for the last 24 hours is stored for display by management functions.

ATM Layer

The statistics collected by LA-110 for the ATM layer include received and transmitted cells, cells received with the cell priority indicator set, the number of received and discarded cells, and the number of cells received with HEC errors.

Physical (E1) Layer

The statistics collected by LA-110 for the physical (E1) layer of the E1 ports are derived from the line signal and CRC-4 data. The collected parameters include code violations, local errored seconds, local severely errored seconds, local seconds with severe framing error events, local seconds with AIS reception, local unavailable seconds, and remote unavailable seconds.

Data Ports

The statistics collected for the data ports are as follows:

• When using the Frame Relay interface, LA-110 collects data on the total number of received and transmitted frames, the number of frames received and transmitted with the congestion indicator set, and the number of frames received and discarded.

• When using the AAL1 Stream interface, LA-110 collects data on the total number of received and transmitted kilobytes.

Ethernet Ports

The statistics collected for Ethernet ports include the total number of received and transmitted frames, and the number of frames received, but discarded.

In addition to the general traffic performance monitoring, LA-110 also collects specific performance data for the Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) traffic:

• At the port level, LA-110 collects general OAM performance data (total number of transmitted and received OAM cells).

• It is also possible to obtain a list of connections (from all ports) which currently have OAM traffic and/or are experiencing LOC.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-18 Functional Description

• At the connection level, the LA-110 collects detailed OAM performance data, including:

Data on the number of VC-AIS and RDI cells

Data on the number of loopback requests and responses (and the resulting number of successful and failed loopbacks)

Amount of time the connection experienced loss of continuity.

• LA-110 also can send OAM loopback requests on a specific connection and collect loopback request and response data (both successful and failed).

Table 1-1 lists the data stored for statistics on system operation.

Table 1-1. LA-110 Stored Data for Statistics

Port/Connection Type of Stored Data Timing of Sampling

ATM Port Total Rx cells, Total Tx cells, Rx CLP=1 cells, Rx discarded cells and Rx HEC cells

During last second, last 15 minutes

User Data Port (E1) Rx/Tx Total Frames, Rx/Tx Congestion Frames and Rx Discarded Frames

During last second, last 15 minutes

ATM CBR Connection Total Rx cells, Total Tx cells, Rx Total Sequential Errors, Rx Total Resync, Rx Total Pointer Parity Errors and Rx Total SNP Errors in the last sand from start

In the last second, and from start

ATM Data Connections

Rx/Tx Total frames, Rx Discarded Frames, Tx Discarded Frames, CRC Errors Frames, Rx/Tx Total Cells, Rx Discarded Cells

In the last second, and from start

Configuration The configuration is performed with an ASCII terminal connected to the supervisory CONTROL port in the LA-110 front panel, or through an SNMP station.

The user selects the configuration parameters.

Updating Software The LA-110 operating software and configuration parameters are stored in flash memory, and can be updated using standard file transfer protocols, such as TFTP. This enables TFTP software and configuration remote download from a central location.

For additional flexibility, the flash memory can store two different software versions. The user can select, by means of the management systems, which software will actually be used by LA-110. This capability provides additional

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Functional Description 1-19

security during remote program downloading, as the previous version can still be used in case of a failure. It also enables supporting different services, in accordance with the user's needs.

The flash memory can also be used to store a copy of the LA-110 database: this enables retrieving a user-selected configuration in case the non-volatile memory is corrupted.

Tests and Diagnostics Capabilities LA-110 offers comprehensive diagnostics and statistics on all ports and network layers, enabling network control and fault localization.

LA-110 monitors the different layers of ATM: physical, ATM layer and adaptation layer performance, including E1 line performance.

The unit supports:

• Application layer statistics

• ATM layer statistics and control (OAM support)

• Physical layer diagnostics (loopback tests, statistics)

End-to-End QoS is measured using F5 OAM cells, including AIS, RDI, LB, CC and activation cells.

LA-110 has comprehensive diagnostics capabilities that include the following types of user-controlled loopbacks:

• Local data port loopback

• Local loopback for the User E1 port interface

• Remote xDSL loopback for the main link interface (SHDSL only)

• Initiation of OAM loopback requests to test a VCC

• Ping to all interfaces with an IP address, including the ATM port, the Ethernet bridge and the Ethernet router. The ping can be sent only from an interface with an active IP. When the ping is sent through the Ethernet router, the LAN interface IP is used as the source address.

Loopback Tests LA-110 supports the following loopbacks:

• Remote loopback on each user port

• Local loopback on each user port

• Remote & Local loopback on each user port (except the CBR)

• Remote loopback on the Network port

• Local loopback on the Network port

• Remote loopback on the ATM payload

• Local loopback on the ATM payload.

Each time that one of the above loopbacks is activated, all ERR indication LEDs light up.

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-20 Functional Description

Alarms LA-110 stores alarms detected during its operation in a buffer that can hold up to 200 alarms. During regular operation, the terminal shows if there are any alarms in the alarm buffer thus notifying the local operator that alarm conditions have been detected. The local operator can then review the contents of the alarm buffer on the terminal, and can delete old alarms.

For on-line monitoring, the user can enable automatic sending of alarms to the supervision terminal, Telnet hosts, and management stations (for SNMP, LMI, and ILMI management purposes, LA-110 automatically converts some alarms to traps). The user can select the types of traps to be sent to each network management station.

LED Indicators Refer to Front Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators in Chapter 3.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Technical Specifications 1-21

1.4 Technical Specifications

ATM Features

AAL support AAL1 AAL2 AAL5

CES and DB-CES LES compliant

UNI 3.1 PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) Only

ATM QoS VC traffic shaping

ATM services UBR - Unspecified Bit Rate

VBR - Variable Bit Rate MBS (Maximum Bit Size) is 1 through 999 cells SCR – Sustained cell rate is 10 through the line rate PCR – Peak cell rate is constant and equal to line rate

CBR - Constant Bit Rate PCR - Peak cell rate is 10 through the line rate

F5 OAM cells As per I.610

VPI range 0 through 31

VCI range 0 through 255

VCs Total maximum: 8

Clocking Types Recovered from the incoming signal of the xDSL interface

Adaptive clock

NTR (SHDSL and ADSL)

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-22 Technical Specifications

Network Interfaces

SHDSL Uplink SHDSL per ITU-T G.991.2, Annex A, B

Line code TC-PAM

Connector RJ-45; pins 4, 5

Data rates n x 64 kbps (n≥3), up to 2.312 Mbps (2 wire)

Handshake protocol G994.1

EOC support Mandatory list

ADSL Uplink ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A, B

Line code Full DMT

Connector RJ-45; pins 4,5

Data rates Up to 8 Mbps downstream, 1 Mbps upstream

User Interfaces LA-110 includes a 10/100BaseT Ethernet User port, optional Data port (V.35/X.21), and in addition, a selection of either 4 ‘FXS’ ports, 4 ‘ISDN’ BRI ports, or an E1 port.

Serial Data ATM AAL Support AAL1, AAL5

Line Rate 64 to 2048 kbps for AAL1 frame

Data Link Protocol Frame Relay Transparent over AAL1 streams

Interworking FRF.5 and FRF.8

EIA-530 Electrical RS-422/V.11

Physical EIA-530: DB25, female V.36: DB37, female (via adapter cable)

Clock modes DCE DTE via cross cable

V.35 Electrical V.35

Physical DB25, female

Clock modes DCE DTE via cross cable

V.36 Electrical RS-449: 37-pin female connector via adapter cable

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Technical Specifications 1-23

X.21 Electrical RS-422/V.11

Physical DB25, female

Clock modes DCE DTE via cross cable

10/100M Ethernet (LAN)

Connector RJ-45

Routing Static, RIP I, RIP II

Transparent or filtering of PPPoE

PPPoA as per RFC-2364

NAT (Network Address Translation)

DHCP relay, Server

ISDN S0 Compliance ETS 300012, I.430, NTT, 5ESS, DMS-100, NI1

Bit Rate 192 kbps

Line Coding Pseudo-ternary

Line Termination 100 ±5%

Connector RJ-45

Analog Voice 4 ports

Modulation Mode PCM (per ITU-T G.711 and AT&T PUB-43801), µ-Law or A-Law Nominal impedance: 600Ω

Return Loss ERL, better than 20 dB

Frequency response (Ref: 1020 Hz)

0.5 dB, 300 to 3000 Hz 1.1 dB, 250 to 3400 Hz

Signal to total distortion, G.712, G.713 method 2

0 to -30 dBm0: better than 33 dB +3 to -45 dBm0: better than 22 dB

Idle Channel Noise Better than -70 dBm0 (+20 dBrnc)

Transformer Isolation 1500 VRMS

Echo Cancellation Support

In accordance with G.168 Tail-end: 4 ms or 16 ms 11 Channels

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-24 Technical Specifications

FXS EIA RS-464 Loop start, WINK start (reverse polarity) for direct connection to a 2-wire telephone

User E1 Port Compliance ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.823

Framing With CRC-4: TS0 MF, CCS Without CRC-4: TS0 MF, CAS 256S (TS16 MF, CAS) with CRC4

Line rate 2.048 Mbps±32 ppm

Line code HDB3

Line impedance 120Ω, balanced 75Ω, unbalanced

Receive level 0 to -30 dB

Transmit level Balanced, ±3V ±10% Unbalanced, ±2.37V ±10%

Jitter ITU-T G.823

Connectors Balanced, RJ-48C, 8-pin: 1. R_ring, 2. R_tip, 3. N.C. 4. T_ring, 5. T_tip, 6, 7, 8. N.C. Unbalanced, two BNC

PRI supported AAL1 – CES

Management Management interfaces SNMP, Telnet, SLIP, LMI and ILMI (inband and out-of-band)

Remote management via Uplink or User ports

Supervisory Ports

Interface devices DCE port: ASCII terminal

Interface RJ-45/RS-232, async

Baud rate 115.2 kbps

Connectors RJ-45

General

Physical Height 43.7 mm/1.7 in (1U)

Width 43.2 cm/19 in

Depth 24.3 cm/9.5 in

Weight 2.3 kg/5.0 lb

Power External power supply (included with unit)

100 to 240 VAC (±10%), 50/60 Hz 10 to 15W

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction

Technical Specifications 1-25

Environment Temperature 0 to 50° C/32 to 122° F

Humidity Up to 90%, non-condensing

EMI/RFI FCC part 15 class A EN55022 class A

Immunity EN50024

Safety EN60950, UL60950, CSA 22.2 No 60950

Chapter 1 Introduction LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

1-26 Technical Specifications

Introduction 2-1

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

This chapter provides instructions for mechanical and electrical installation of LA-110. For rack installation of LA-110, refer to the Rack Mounting Kit for 19-inch Racks guide that comes with the RM kit.

After installing the unit:

• Refer to Chapter 4 for general system configuration information and procedures using an ASCII terminal or Telnet host connected to the LA-110 CONTROL supervisory port.

• Refer to Chapter 5 for configuration of connectors in user modules.

• Refer to Chapter 6 for supervision and configuration commands.

• Refer to Chapter 7 for control commands.

• Refer to Chapter 8 for display commands.

In case a problem is encountered, refer to Chapter 9 for test and diagnostics instructions.

2.1 Introduction

LA-110 supports a fully automatic remote installation. Consequently, you only need to connect the wires to the LA-110 connectors. Upon power-up, LA-110 opens a channel to the network, and receives from it all parameters including the IP addresses.

As an ATM IAD, LA-110 provides all of the QoS and management requirements to ensure reliable services.

RADview management software is also available to support large networks. The unit supports ILMI (Interim Local Management Interface) at the ATM E1 port.

No internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be performed by either the operator or the user; such activities may be performed only by skilled service personnel who are aware of the hazards involved. Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation, and maintenance of this product.

Warning

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

2-2 Package Contents

2.2 Site Requirements and Prerequisites

LA-110 is delivered completely assembled. It is designed for installation as a desktop unit, for wall mounting, or for mounting in a 19-inch rack. For rack installation instructions refer to the Rack Mounting Kit for 19-inch Racks guide that comes with the RM-33 kit.

AC-powered LA-110 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 ft) of an easily accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the required supply voltage, in the range of 100 to 240 VAC.

Allow at least 90 cm (36 inches) of frontal clearance for operator access. Allow at least 10 cm (4 inches) clearance at the rear of the unit for interface cable connections.

The ambient operating temperature of the LA-110 should be 0° C to 50° C (32° F to 122° F), at a relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.

Make a preliminary inspection of the equipment container before unpacking. Evidence of damage should be noted and reported immediately to the distributor.

2.3 Package Contents

The LA-110 package includes the following items:

• LA-110 unit

• Integrated Access Devices CD-ROM that includes the LA-110 Installation and Operation manual

• External Power Supply: AC power cord P/S-AC/5/3.3/2500

• Interface adaptor cable/s (for the interface ordering options, see Table 2-1.

• Control port adapter cable: CBL-RJ45/D9/F/STR

• RM-33 kit for rack installation (if ordered).

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Installation and Setup 2-3

2.4 Equipment Needed

The DTE cables you need depend on the LA-110 application. You can use standard cables or make the appropriate cables yourself in accordance with the pinouts given in Appendix A. Table 2-1 lists the cables available from RAD according to the DTE interface.

Table 2-1. DTE Interfaces and Matching Connector Cables

DTE Interface Interface Description RAD cable

V.35 34-pin, female CBL-530/V35/F

X.21 15-pin, female CBL-530T/21C/F

V.36 37-pin, female CBL-530/449/F

2.5 Installation and Setup

Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show typical rear panels of an LA-110 unit, and identify the connector locations.

Figure 2-1. LA-110 Rear Panel – ISDN with Optional Data Port

Figure 2-2. LA-110 Rear Panel – FXS

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

2-4 Installation and Setup

Grounding Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or outside the device) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal can make the device dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.

Before switching on this device and before connecting any other cable, the protective earth terminals must be connected to the protective ground conductor of each power cord (LA-110 has two power cords). The power plug should only be inserted in an outlet provided with a protective ground (earth) contact. The protective action must not be negated by use of an extension cord (power cable) without a protective conductor (grounding). Make sure that only the fuse with the required rated current, as marked on the LA-110 rear panel, and of the specified type are used for replacement. If the protection provided by fuses has been reduced, the device must be rendered inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation.

Setting of Module Jumpers and Switches The LA-110 unit does not contain internal jumpers or switches which should be configured by the user and therefore, removing the product cover is not required.

The E1 module contains jumpers and switches that may have to be set before inserting them in the slots.

Jumper Settings for E1 Module

E1 module jumpers J1, J2, J3 and JP2, JP3 set Balanced/Unbalanced for the BNC E1 interface. They are shown in Figure 2-3. They are used to support balanced (BAL) and unbalanced (UNBAL) connections.

Warning

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Connections 2-5

BAL

UNBAL

J1J3

JP3JP2

Unbalanced

JP3JP2

Balanced

JP3JP2

Figure 2-3. E1 Jumper Locations

2.6 Connections

E1 User Port LA-110 includes two options for connection to E1 interface:

• Balanced Interface: Connect to the RJ-45 connector designated User (Default)

• Unbalanced interface: Connect to the two BNC connectors designated TX (transmit output) and RX (receive input). Figure 2-4 shows the LA-110 rear panel with Unbalanced Interface. Refer to Appendix A for pinout connections.

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

2-6 Connections

Figure 2-4. LA-110 Rear Panel – Unbalanced Interface

Data Port LA-110 is available with an optional Data port. Connect the user's equipment to the LA-110 Data port via the rear panel connectors marked DATA (see Figure 2-1).

The marking near the interface connector identifies each connector. Connector pin allocations and adapter cable wiring data appear in Appendix A. The available interface ports are:

X.21 Interface: The X.21 interface has a 15-pin D-type female connector, wired for direct connection to X.21 DTE interfaces.

RS-530 Interface: The RS-530 interface has a 25-pin D-type female connector wired for direct connection to RS-530/RS-422 DTE interfaces.

V.35 Interface: The V.35 interface has a 34-pin female connector, wired for direct connection to V.35 DTE interfaces.

RS-449/V. 36 Interface: The RS-449/V.36 interface has a 37-pin female connector wired for direct connection to RS-449 DTE interfaces.

If you are using RS-530 or RS-449/V.36, use the cable that is provided by RAD.

Ethernet Port The Ethernet port, labeled as LAN in the rear panel, has a 10/100BaseT interface terminated in a shielded RJ-45 connector. The Ethernet interface supports UTP media. The interface is intended for direct connection to an Ethernet hub port, using a UTP cable wired point-to-point.

For connection to another station port, e.g. to a PC with Ethernet NIC, use a cross-cable.

Supervisory Port The LA-110 has one supervisory connector marked CONTROL intended for:

• Connection to a supervision terminal

• Connection to data communications equipment for SLIP communication (used by Telnet hosts and SNMP management stations).

Supervision Terminal

To connect LA-110 to a Supervision Terminal:

• Connect the LA-110 configuration cable from the CONTROL DCE connector to the RS-232 port in the supervision terminal. If the supervision terminal is

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Installation and Setup

Connections 2-7

connected via modems, use a cross-over cable. The cable pinout connections are provided in Appendix A.

SNMP Management Stations

To connect LA-110 to a SNMP Management Station:

1. Connect a cable, prepared in accordance with instructions in Appendix A, between the CONTROL connector and the network management station, using a cross-over cable.

2. If the connection is made via a modem link, use a straight cable.

Control Port The CONTROL port interface (see Figure 2-1) is RS-232 RJ-45 type connector. Connect the CBL///D(/STR/F adapter cable which RAD supplies, to the CONTROL port and to the DB-9 terminal port. This interface serves as DCE.

Power AC power is supplied to LA-110 by the External Power Supply unit.

To connect power:

1. Push the 8-pin connector (see Figure 2-5) of the cable, on the output of the External Power Supply unit (P/S-AC/5/3.3/2500) that RAD supplies, into Power on the back panel of LA-110, until it snaps into place.

2. Connect the 3-pronged input plug of the External Power Supply unit to a 6.6-foot (2m) standard power cable, and then to the mains outlet.

To disconnect power:

• Press on the tab of the 8-pin connector in the Power outlet and pull out gently.

Figure 2-5. Power Supply Connector

1 2 3 485 6 7

Figure 2-6. External Power Supply Pin Assignment

Chapter 2 Installation and Setup LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

2-8 Connections

Front Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators 3-1

Chapter 3 Operation This section describes:

• Front Panel controls, connectors, and indicators

• Preliminary settings for initial configuration session

• Operating instructions

• Running a supervisory terminal management session

• Management activities

• LA-110 configuration procedure

• Configuring general parameters.

3.1 Front Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators

Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of LA-110. Table 3-1 lists the functions of the controls, connectors, and indicators located on the LA-110 front panel.

PWR

LAN

WAN

LA-110

Figure 3-1. LA-110 Front Panel

Table 3-1. LA-110 Controls, Connectors and Indicators– Front Panel

Object Control, Indicator Function

PWR Power green LED Lights up when power is On

LAN LED

Green – transmission occurs

Indicates the operating status of the LAN port in the front panel

WAN WAN Red – no synchronization

Blinking between green and red – synchronization in process

Green – synchronization occurs

Indicates the operating status of the Network port module

Figure 3-2 shows a typical LA-110 rear panel. Table 3-2 lists the functions of the controls and connectors located on LA-110 rear panel.

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-2 Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session

Figure 3-2. Typical LA-110 Rear Panel

Table 3-2. LA-110 Controls and Connectors – Rear Panel

Control, Indicator Function

Power connector Power connector, 100-240V AC

POWER When connected, the system is powered

LAN connector LAN data connector, type 10/100BaseT port

NETWORK Uplink port to ATM network: SHDSL or ADSL

DATA DATA for User Data port

USER User data connection module: E1, ISDN or POTS: FXS interfaces for data or voice transmission

3.2 Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session

The LA-110 configuration, consisting of a complete collection of operating parameters, is determined by a database stored in non-volatile memory.

LA-110 features a setup program for the configuration of the modules. This program is invoked and run from an ASCII terminal or a PC emulator. The terminal or PC emulator is connected to the (RS-232) RJ-45 CONTROL (DCE) port on the LA-110 rear panel.

LA-110 configuration and system monitoring, including troubleshooting procedures, can also be performed from a remote site using SNMP network management stations.

Terminal Characteristics

Any standard ASCII terminal (dumb terminal or personal computer emulating an ASCII terminal) equipped with an RS-232 communication interface can be used to control the LA-110 operation.

Software

The software necessary to run the LA-110 supervision program is contained in the LA-110. Moreover, the LA-110 stores all the configuration information generated or altered during the communication with the terminal: no information is stored in the terminal.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session 3-3

Telnet (IP) Host Characteristics

Typically, the Telnet host is a PC or a UNIX station, with the appropriate suite of TCP/IP protocols. The host can be directly connected to the Ethernet connector of the managed LA-110. However, the host may also be located at a remote site, the only requirement being that IP communication is established between that site and the managed LA-110.

CONTROL Port

General

LA-110 communicates with the supervision terminal through the rear panel CONTROL connector. The connection is made via the adapter cable CBL-RJ45/D9/F/STR, which is supplied by RAD.

Parameters • Supported data rates are: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600 and 115200 bps

• Word format: 7 or 8 data bits

• Parity: Odd, Even, or Disabled

CONTROL Configuration

Handshaking between LA-110 and the supervision terminal uses the CONTROL lines in the CONTROL connector. This provides a DCE interface for direct connection to terminals.

Autobaud Function

When the Autobaud function is enabled, the CONTROL port can recognize the operating data rate of the terminal by analyzing the timing of three consecutive Carriage Return + Line Feed characters (generated by pressing <Enter> or <Carriage Return> three times. The detected data rate is then used for the current communication session.

Initial Configuration Procedure To begin initial configuration from a supervision terminal:

1. Configure the terminal to the communication parameters used by the CONTROL port: Select the full-duplex mode.

Turn the terminal to Echo Off.

Disable any type of flow control.

2. Set the following default communication parameters for the initial configuration session: 115.2 kbps, one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, and one stop bit.

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-4 Operating Instructions

3. Connect the supervision cable of the terminal to the CONTROL port of LA-110.

4. Turn On the supervision terminal.

These steps are described below.

If you are using RS-530 or RS-449/V.36, use the cable that is provided by RAD.

To connect the Terminal:

1. Connect the LA-110 configuration cable to the RS-232 port on the Terminal or PC emulator.

2. Attach the other end of the cable to the CONTROL port in LA-110.

To configure the Terminal:

1. Turn the Terminal On.

2. Set the terminal to work at the following settings: Default rate or baud rate of 115.2 kbps

No parity

8 bits/character.

Turning on LA-110 To turn on LA-110:

1. Connect LA-110. The boot process starts running.

2. Following the boot, all the indicators except PWR turn Off (refer to Normal Indications and Table 3-1.

The operational screen is displayed on the Terminal. LA-110 is now ready for configuration.

3. Proceed to configure the unit in order for LA-110 to function. The configuration of LA-110 consists of a complete setup of operating parameters, is determined by a database stored in non-volatile memory.

3.3 Operating Instructions

LA-110 is designed for unattended operation, but must be configured after installation.

The RS-232 supervisory CONTROL port allows full control over LA-110 operation, reading of alarm messages, diagnostic functions, and monitoring of LA-110 operation and performance. All these functions are performed using simple command lines.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session 3-5

Normal Indications During normal operation:

• The PWR indicator lights up

• The LAN indicator lights up when a packet is received or transmitted on the LAN side

• The WAN indicator lights up:

Green – when synchronization occurs

Red – when synchronization does not occur.

Turning Off To turn Off:

• Disconnect the power cord from the rear panel.

3.4 Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session

Starting a Control Session The supervision instructions are usually performed after the initial configuration of LA-110 and should be performed using a standard ASCII terminal connected to CONTROL supervisory port.

However, after performing the initial configuration, you can manage LA-110 system using one of the following options:

• Terminal as a supervision terminal, for performing all the management activities supported by the LA-110 system.

• Any IP host using the Telnet protocol. After establishing a Telnet session with the LA-110 system, the Telnet protocol offers the same functionality as the supervision terminal, and in addition enables remote access over IP networks. At any time, LA-110 can be engaged in a single Telnet session.

• SNMP-based network management stations. SNMP management stations can communicate with LA-110 inband (through the main link or through Ethernet operation).

• Inband, through the main link, by means of network management stations using the ILMI protocol.

Login Password Before you can access any configuration menus you are prompted to login; you must supply the password. Using a password prevents unauthorized personnel from changing configuration parameters.

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-6 Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session

To enter the password:

• Enter the password (up to 20 characters) after you are prompted.

PASSWORD>********************

Figure 3-3. Password Prompt

The password can be changed or removed during configuration (see DEF PASSWORD).

Factory default password: 1234.

If you enter an illegal password three times, the screen shown in Figure 3-4 appears.

= Illegal Password for 3 times, please wait 15 minutes.

= PASSWORD>

=

= 15 minutes halt, due to illegal password.

= PASSWORD>

Figure 3-4. Illegal Password Message

Security Password

The Superuser can configure all the parameters of LA-110.

To enter as a Superuser:

• Enter Superuser’s password.

The screen shown in Figure 3-5 appears.

PASSWORD>****

SUPERUSER MODE

LA110>

Figure 3-5. Superuser Mode

The User cannot make configuration changes; only display Performance Monitoring statistics and configuration.

To enter as a User:

• Enter user’s password.

The screen shown in Figure 3-6 appears.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Running a Supervisory Terminal Management Session 3-7

PASSWORD>****

USER MODE

LA110>

Figure 3-6. User Mode

Login Message

To initiate the login message:

1. Verify that the terminal now displays the LA110> prompt for further commands.

2. If this does not occur, press <Enter> several times on the terminal to invoke the login message.

Navigating the Terminal Screen This paragraph presents LA-110 supervision language syntax, usage, and set of commands.

• The top line of each screen displays the screen title (usually the task performed via the window). Most screens display a selection of fields and require you to enter a value for the parameter.

• Commands can only be entered when the LA-110> supervisory port prompt is displayed. It always appears at the beginning of a new line. The cursor appears to the right of the prompt.

• Commands are case-insensitive, that is to say, you can type commands in either lower case and/or upper case letters.

• The screens present one new line at a time, and request you to enter your selection for each field in the line.

• To correct typing errors, backspace by pressing the BACKSPACE key to clear the desired character, and then type again the correct characters.

• Use space as a separator between command fields and/or parameters.

• To advance fields in the same line, press <Tab>.

• To select values for a field, press key <F> (Forward) or <B> (Backwards). This operation enables you to select an option, for example Yes or No.

• If a field requires to enter a number as value in a field, type the value.

• Once you have selected your options in the field in a line (field), press <Enter> (Carriage Return <CR> key) to advance to the next line. Next parameters are displayed only after the <Enter> key is pressed.

• Commands must end by pressing <Enter> (or a carriage return <CR>).

• Once you press <Enter> at the last data field line, the system responds by approving your selection or issues an error message.

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-8 Management Activities

• In case an error is detected during the command evaluation, the command is not executed. Instead, LA-110 will send the erroneous command back to the terminal, and the terminal will display BAD COMMAND OR PARAMETER. TYPE H FOR HELP in the next row. The correct command must then be entered again. The parameter values entered by the user are also evaluated.

• If a parameter value is found to be out-of-range, pressing the <Enter> or <Tab> key automatically corrects the error by selecting the closest allowed value.

• To cancel the current command, press <Ctrl+C>. The LA-110> prompt is displayed again.

• To repeat and execute the last command, press <Ctrl+D>.

• To display the last command, press <Ctrl+A>; after the command is displayed, you can edit the command. Press <Enter> to execute it.

LA-110 automatically disconnects the ongoing session if no command is received from the terminal for the specified time-out interval.

3.5 Management Activities

LA-110 includes two main input/output capabilities:

• Voice

• Data

The voice and data transmission capabilities are dependent on the actual LA-110 port installed on the unit.

Therefore, the configuration procedures are performed in two steps:

• Definition of the voice parameters

• Configuration of the data transmission module.

LA-110 enables you to define general parameters before configuring the ports in the unit.

Figure 3-7 shows a typical screen.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

Configuration procedure 3-9

La-110> def user

E1 Interface – USER side

Synchronization Idle-code

FAST (1 sec) 7e

Framing Line-code Receiver-sensitivity CRC-4

multi-frame (G732S) HDB3 30 dB ON

Signaling Sample Time

0.5 sec

Figure 3-7. Typical LA-110 Terminal Screen

3.6 Configuration procedure

LA-110 is a self-identifying unit that detects and identifies its operating environment and its hardware configuration. LA-110 detects the network type to which it is connected, and requests further configuration in accordance with the requirements for proper operation.

To configure LA-110:

1. Define the General Parameters.

2. Define the System Parameters.

3. Define each Port’s physical parameters.

4. Configure the Connection of each Port.

Figure 3-8 shows the configuration process.

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-10 Configuration procedure

Define Each Connection ParameterCommand Line: ADD CONN USERCommand Line: ADD CONN LANCommand Line: ADD CONN DATA

CONFIGURATION PROCEDURES

DEFINE GENERAL PARAMETERS

CONFIGURE THE PORT’S PHYSICAL PARAMETERS

Define the Network, LAN, Data, and User PortsCommand Line: DEF NETWORKCommand Line: DEF LANCommand Line: DEF DATACommand Line: DEF USERCommand Line: ADD BUNDLE(for E1/T1 module only-in User)

CONFIGURE EACH CONNECTION

DEFINE THE SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Configure the Adaptation Layer and other TransmissionParametersCommand Line: DEF SYSPARAMS

Command Line: DEF CLOCKCommand Line: DEF DATECommand Line: DEF TIMECommand Line: DEF NAMECommand Line: DEF PASSWORD

Figure 3-8. LA-110 Configuration Procedures

• General Parameters are described in this chapter

• Configuration of System Parameters and Configuring Ports are described in Chapter 4

• Connection Configuration is described in Chapter 5

• Supervision Commands are described in Chapter 6

• Control Commands are described in Chapter 7

• Display Options are described in Chapter 8

• Troubleshooting and Diagnostics are described in Chapter 9.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

General Parameters 3-11

3.7 General Parameters

DEF TERM SET

Purpose

Defines the codes used to perform the following terminal control functions:

• Clear screen

• Move cursor to screen home position

• Move cursor to the right by one position.

Format

DEF TERM SET

Use

To define the type of Terminal:

1. Type: def term set

2. Press <Enter>. A list of applicable terminals is displayed (see Figure 3-9).

3. Enter the terminal number in accordance with the current terminal in use.

4. To change the current terminal, enter the desired number, and then press <Enter>.

5. If Other is selected, the codes entry form is displayed. This screen includes three separate lines, displayed one after the other. A typical screen showing all the three lines is shown in Figure 3-10.

6. Enter the appropriate hexadecimal digits and press <Enter> to proceed to the next line.

7. Repeat the procedure until all the necessary values are changed, and then press <Enter> to execute.

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port

Connections

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-12 General Parameters

LA110> def term set

The following terminals are available:

1. VT100

2. TV920

3. TV52

4. VT52

5. FREEDOM 100/110 func

6. FREEDOM 220 func

7. Other

Enter a terminal number: 1

Figure 3-9. DEF TERM SET

Clear screen : 00000000 Cursor home : 00000000 Cursor right : 00000000

Figure 3-10. DEF TERM SET – Other

DEF PASSWORD

Format

DEF PASSWORD

To define your own Password:

1. Type: def password

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter your password.

3. Enter your password (up to 10 characters and/or numbers).

4. Enter new password and type a second time for confirmation.

5. Press <Enter>. The terminal now displays a message that your password was successfully changed, and the LA110> prompt appears for further commands.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

General Parameters 3-13

LA110>def password

User Type : Superuser

Old Password : ****

New Password : ******

Confirm New password : ******

New password was successfully changed.

Figure 3-11. DEF PASSWORD

• Use of Password protection for the configuration is recommended. Always use the Exit option in the Main menu once the unit has been configured. Using the Exit option will force personnel requiring access to the configuration procedure to use password.

• Password verification is case sensitive. Once the password is set, use the same case that you used when typing the password.

DEF CLOCK

Purpose

Defines the source of the system clock.

Format

DEF CLOCK

To define the clock:

1. Type: def clock

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select: Internal

Adaptive Clock

Derived from the main link – System timing is locked to the clock signal recovered from the main link receive signal.

4. Press <Enter>.

5. If derived from the main link, select NTR (see Figure 3-13): Enable

Disable

6. Press <Enter>.

For uplink connection to xDSL, the clock and data rate, and other transmission parameters, are supplied by default from the DSLAM port connected to LA-110.

Notes

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-14 General Parameters

LA110>def clock

System Clock: Adaptive clock

2002-03-13T16:05:08

Figure 3-12. DEF CLOCK – Adaptive Clock

LA110>def clock

System clock : Derived from the main link

NTR : NTR enabled

2002-04-8T09:52:16

Figure 3-13. DEF CLOCK – Derived from the Main Link

DEF NAME

Purpose

Defines the system logical name (up to 17 alphanumeric characters).

Format

DEF NAME

To define the system logical name:

1. Type: def name

2. Press <Enter>

3. Type the desired name (up to 17 alphanumeric characters), and then press <Enter>. In Figure 3-14 the system name LA110 is currently assigned to Name.

Name : LA110

Figure 3-14. DEF NAME

DEF DATE

Purpose

Sets the date for LA-110 internal clock. The format YYYY-MM-DD is used.

Format

DEF DATE

Use

1. Type: def date

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Operation

General Parameters 3-15

2. Press <Enter>. The screen displays three lines, one after the other. A typical data form showing all the three lines is shown in Figure 3-15.

3. Use <F> to increase, or <B> to decrease, the displayed value until the desired value is reached. Press <Enter> to proceed to the next line.

Year : 2002

Month : 01

Day : 09

Figure 3-15. DEF DATE

DEF TIME

Purpose

Sets the time for LA-110 internal clock. The 24-hour format is used.

Format

DEF TIME

Use

1. Type: def time

2. Press <Enter>. The screen displays three lines, one after the other. A typical data form showing all the three lines is shown in Figure 3-16.

3. Use <F> to increase, or <B> to decrease, the displayed value until the desired value is reached. Press <Enter> to proceed to the next line.

4. Set the time one minute beyond the current time, and then press <Enter> to execute.

Hour : 11

Minute : 01

Second : 09

Figure 3-16. DEF TIME

Chapter 3 Operation LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

3-16 General Parameters

Configuration of System Parameters 4-1

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters This chapter describes:

• Configuring System Parameters (DEF SYSPARAMS)

• Defining Ports

4.1 Configuration of System Parameters

You must define the system parameters for LA-110. These definitions determine the transmission parameters, and they are dependent on the type of the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) of the ATM Protocol Reference Model used in the current application of LA-110 (see Voice & Data Convergence in Chapter 1).

DEF SYSPARAMS LA-110 supports the following types of AAL protocols:

• AAL1 for voice and data

• AAL2 for voice

• AAL5 for data.

Format

DEF SYSPARAMS

Use

1. Type: def sysparams

2. Press <Enter>. Figure 4-1 appears. To use the default Coding law type Y and press <Enter>. If you change the Coding law, the device will reboot.

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port

Connections

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-2 Configuration of System Parameters

LA-110>def sysparams

Coding Law : u law

If Coding Law is changed the device will reboot.

Do you wish to save the changes ? (Y/N)

Figure 4-1. Changing Coding Law – Confirmation

3. Select DHCP Server, Adaptation layer, and press <Enter> (see Figure 4-2).

The Sysparams parameters are described in Table 4-1.

LA-110> Def sysparams

Coding Law : A law

DHCP Server : Disable

Jitter Buffer (in ms) : 5

Adaptation layer : AAL 1

Figure 4-2. DEF SYSPARAMS – Continued

The next configuration steps differ: For AAL1 (see Figure 4-2)

For AAL2 (see Figure 4-5).

If Coding Law is changed, the user is asked for confirmation (see Figure 4-1): • Save Changes is No – a message is displayed: “The Coding Law did not change”. • Save Changes is Yes – the device automatically reboots. If the user stops the command before the end, none of the changes are saved and there is no reset.

Changing the Adaptation Layer

• If you change the Adaptation Layer, you are prompted (see Figure 4-3).

If Y, the message in Figure 4-4 appears. The device automatically reboots.

If Adaptation Layer is changed - all connections will be deleted. Do you wish to continue ? (Y/N).

Figure 4-3. Message to Change Adaptation Layer

The Adaptation Layer was changed successfully: AAL1

Please wait .....

Figure 4-4. Adaptation Layer Changed Successfully

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuration of System Parameters 4-3

AAL2

To configure AAL2:

1. Select AAL2.

2. Select Application Identifier. The Adaptation Layer AAL2 screens for different Application Identifications : PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP)

PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (with ELCP) (see Figure 4-5)

CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP) (see Figure 4-6).

Local Loop Emulation Service (LES) default VCC is used for Plug & Play purposes; all connections will be created with the VP.VC which is determined by default VCC.

3. Select SSCS Parameters: Encoding Selection and Encoding Profile and press<Enter>.

4. Select CPS Parameters and press <Enter>.

5. Select AAL2 Shaping Mode: VBR3 or CBR, and press <Enter>.

6. Select ISDN Activation Mode: Permanent or Non-permanent and press <Enter>.

The Sysparams parameters are described in Table 4-1.

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-4 Configuration of System Parameters

LA-110> Def Sysparams

Coding Law: A law

DHCP Server: N/A (use DEF LAN to change lan to router mode)

Jitter Buffer (in ms): 10

Adaptation Layer: AAL2

LES Default VCC: VPI.VCI

0 38

Application Identifier:

PSTN for POTS & DSSI for ISDN (with ELCP)

Normal Ringing On-hook Off-hook

0101 0000 0101 1111

SSCS Parameters:

Encoding Selection Encoding Profile

Master/Slave 9 – PCM – 64,44 octet packets, without silence

CPS PARAMETERS

CPS Optimization: Single CPS no overlap

AAL2 Shaping Mode: CBR

ISDN Activation Mode: Non Permanent

Figure 4-5. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2 – PSTN for POTS & DSSI for ISDN (with ELCP)

If you change the Adaptation Layer, you are prompted: All connections will be deleted. Do you wish to continue?

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuration of System Parameters 4-5

LA110>def sysparams

Coding Law : A law

DHCP Server : Disable

Jitter Buffer (in ms) : 5

Adaptation layer : AAL 2

LES Default VCC : VPI.VCI

0 38

Application Identifier :

CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP)

SSCS PARAMETERS:

Encoding Selection Encoding Profile

Master/Slave 9 - PCM - 64 ,44 octet packets , without silence

CPS PARAMETERS

CPS optimization : Single CPS no overlap

AAL2 Shaping mode : CBR

ISDN Activation Mode: Non Permanent

Please wait .....

The LA 110 is now performing reboot....

Figure 4-6. DEF SYSPARAMS – AAL2 – CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN

Changing the Application ID

• If the Application ID is changed, a prompt appears (see Figure 4-7).

If Y, a prompt appears and the device automatically reboots (see Figure 4-8).

If app id is changed the device will reboot and all AAL2 connections will be deleted.

Do you wish to save the changes ? (Y/N)

Figure 4-7. Message to Change Application ID

The APP ID value was changed successfully.

Figure 4-8. Application ID Changed Successfully

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-6 Configuration of System Parameters

Table 4-1. Sysparams Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

Coding Law Specifies the compounding law to be used by the voice channels, for compressing and expanding the amplitude range of the voice signal for economical transmission

A law, u law

Default Value: A law

Note: LA-110 reboots after you change the Coding Law value.

DHCP Server Enables the DHCP server. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a TCP/IP protocol that enables PCs and workstations to get temporary or permanent IP addresses from centrally-administered servers.

Enable, Disable, N/A Default Value: Disable

Jitter Buffer Sets the buffer size in msec for jitter buffer management.The jitter buffer adapts the size of LA-110 traffic to the Cell Delay Variation (CDV) of the ATM network.

5 to 20

Default Value: 5

Adaptation Layer E1/T1, FXS, ISDN communication channel in uplink connection

AAL1, AAL2

Default Value:AAL2

LES Default VCC Local Loop Emulation Service (LES) default VCC is used for Plug & Play purposes; all connections will be created with the VP.VC which is determined by default VCC.

Default Value: 0.38

Note: This only applies to AAL2.

Application Identifier CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP)

CAS (Channel Associated Signaling) for POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) – CAS signifies inband signaling is used to provide signaling information along with a call. This inband signal is made up of tones that pass within the voice frequency band and are carried along the same circuit as the talk/path that is being established by the signals.

DSS1 - Digital Subscriber Signaling #1 for ATM broadband signaling at Basic Rate Interface (BRI) with two bearer B-channels at 64 Kbps and a data D-channel at 16 kbps, can be selected with or without ELCP.

PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (with ELCP)

PSTN for POTS – Public Switched Telephone Network (CCS - Common Channel Signaling) for POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service). The CCS is a high-speed, packet switched communications network that is separate from the public packet switched and message networks.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuration of System Parameters 4-7

Table 4-1. Sysparams Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

Application Identifier (cont.) PSTN (CCS) for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP)

Default Value: PSTN for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (with ELCP)

General Signaling Represents the signaling of the User E1/T1 interface. These four signaling parameters determine the configuration of the A, B, C, D bits of the E1/T1 interface.

Normal 0101 / 0100

Default value: 0101

Ringing 0000

Default value: 0000

On-Hook 0101 / 0100

Default value: 0101

Off-Hook 1111 / 1100

Default value: 1111

SSCS (Service Specific Convergence Sublayer Parameters

The purpose of the SSCS (Service Specific Convergence Sublayer) is to convey narrow-band calls consisting of voice, voiceband data, or circuit mode data.

The SSCS specifies packet formats and procedures to encode the different information streams for bandwidth-efficient transport by AAL type 2. It accommodates known techniques of low rate audio encoding, silence compression, and facsimile demodulation/remodulation. It makes provision for inband signaling of narrow-band calls and for control of the SSCS operating state.

The SSCS anticipates that multiplexing in the Common Part Sublayer will be used to carry many calls over a single ATM connection, which will therefore act as a trunk group for transmission between two points of access.

Note: These parameters are for CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN.

Encoding Selection Determines which profile entry LA-110 will use

Master/Slave, Independent

Default value: Master/Slave

ATM Forum Encoding Profile

7 – PCM - 64 ,ADPCM 32 ,44 octet packets , and silence

8 – PCM - 64 ,44 octet packets , and silence

9 – PCM - 64 ,44 octet packets , without silence

10 – PCM - 64 ,ADPCM 32,44 octet packets , without silence

11 – PCM - 64 ,ADPCM 32,40 octet packets , without silence

12 – PCM - 64 ,ADPCM 32,40 octet packets , with silence

Default value: 9 – PCM - 64 ,44 octet packets , without silence

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-8 Configuring Ports

Table 4-1. Sysparams Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

CPS (Common Pass Sublayer) Parameters

CPS optimization (Read-only)

Single CPS no overlap, Multiple CPS with overlap

Default value: Single CPS no overlap

AAL2 Shaping mode CBR, VBR3

Default value: CBR

ISDN Activation Mode Layer 1 ISDN Activation mode

Permanent , Non Permanent

Default value: Non Permanent

4.2 Configuring Ports

General There are four ports in LA-110 that must be configured. The physical parameters are a function of the type of module being configured.

• Network – ADSL or G.SHDSL

• Data – V.35, RS-530, RS-449/V.36, or X.21

• LAN

• User – E1, ISDN or POTS – FXS.

Refer to Installation and Setup in Chapter 2 for port connections.

DEF NETWORK

Format

DEF NETWORK

Use

1. Type: def network

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Set a value for each parameter displayed.

ADSL

When the Network port is ADSL, the menu shown in Figure 4-9 appears.

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port

Connections

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-9

LA-110> Def Network

Scramble Idle Cell CLP CDVT Optimization

Enable 1 (ITU) no

Framing type Trellis coding

2 NTR Enabled

Transmission mode Standard compliance

EC G.dmt

Tx frequency Bin Rx frequency Bin

Maximum bits per bin Start End Start End

15 6 6 6 32

Tx Power attenuation Pilot tone request

0 PTR Enabled

Figure 4-9. DEF NETWORK – ADSL

Table 4-2 presents the available configuration parameters values for the Network with an ADSL port.

Table 4-2. DEF NETWORK – ADSL

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Scramble Enable / Disable

Default Value: Enable

Adding scrambling to the communications with the network

Idle cell CLP 1 (ITU) / 0 (ATM Forum)

Default Value: 1 (ITU)

Determines the Cell Loss Priority of the idle cell. When CLP=1 the idle cell may be discarded during periods of congestion

CDVT Optimization

Yes

No

CDVT parameter is the tolerance that the switch policer will allow when policing the PCR of a given VC.

LA-110 will transmit the cells of a given VC with a minimum CDVT.

LA-110 will transmit the cells of a given VC without any CDVT consideration. By this transmission method the ATM network should have CDVT values of 2-3 ms.

Framing Type Type 2 (64 kBit/s overhead) Type 3 (32 kBit/s overhead)

Default Value: Type 2

A process of adjusting the timing of the receiver to coincide with that of the received framing signals

Trellis Coding Trellis coding enabled

Trellis coding disabled

Default Value: Trellis coding enabled

Method that allows to determine, based on the value of the preceding signal, whether or not a given signal element is received in error

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-10 Configuring Ports

Table 4-2. DEF NETWORK – ADSL (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Transmission Mode EC / FDM

Default Value: EC

Determines the mode of transmission over the line, either Echo Cancellation (EC – for the isolation and filtering of unwanted signals caused by echoes from the user transmitted signal) or Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) - the available transmission bandwidth is divided by frequency into narrower bands, each used for a separate voice or data transmission channel

Standard Compliance T1-413, G.dmt, Alcatel 1.4, Alcatel, ADI, Multimode

Default Value: G.dmt

Maximum Bits per Bin 0 –15

Default Value: 15

Tx (Transmission) Frequency Bin

Start/End: 6–31

Default Value: 6

Next Pilot Only relevant for Annex C

Annex C type Only relevant for Annex C

Rx (Receive) Frequency Bin Start/End: 6–31 when EC is selected for Transmission Mode

32–255 when FDM is selected for Transmission Mode

Default Value: 6 or 32 accordingly

Tx (Transmission) Power Attenuation

Start/End: 0–12 dB

Default Value: 0

Pilot Tone Request (PTR) Start/End: PTR enabled, PTR disabled

Default Value: PTR enabled

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-11

G.SHDSL Uplink

When the Network is type G.SHDSL, the menu shown in Figure 4-10 is displayed.

Scramble Idle Cell CLP Traffic Shaping

Enable 1 (ITU) UBR

Mode Framer Type

CO Serial ATM

Power Backoff Standard

Enabled Annex A

Startup Margin Asym. PSD Line Probe Enable

0 dB Asym Disable Adaptive Rate

Min Rate Max Rate

200 kbps 2312 kbps

Figure 4-10. Network Port Configuration - G.SHDSL Uplink

Table 4-3 lists the available configuration parameter values for Network – G.SHDSL port.

Table 4-3. DEF NETWORK – G.SHDSL Parameters

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Scramble Enable, Disable

Default Value: Enable

Adding scrambling to the communications with the network

Idle cell CLP 1 (ITU

0 (ATM Forum)

Default Value: 1 (ITU)

Determines the Cell Loss Priority of the idle cell. When CLP=1 the idle cell may be discarded during periods of congestion

Traffic Shaping UBR, VBR, CBR

Default Value: As selected

A congestion control management procedure in which data traffic is regulated in order that it conforms to a specified, desirable pattern behavior. The selected traffic shaping affects the list of parameters required to be defined.

Mode CO, CPE Default Value: CPE

Determines the source of the clock for synchronization - either Central (CO) from the Central Office Equipment, or from a Remote site (R) from the Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)

Framer Type Serial ATM, Unframed, E1 Slotted, Utopia L1 A, Utopia L1 B, Utopia L2, N x 64

Default Value: Serial ATM

Determines the type of frame in the ATM transmission

Power Backoff Enabled, Disabled

Default Value: Enabled

Enables or disables the transmission power backoff

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-12 Configuring Ports

Table 4-3. DEF NETWORK – G.SHDSL Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Annex American (A), European (B) spectral compatibility

Default Value: A

Network Timing Reference (NTR)

Local Oscillator, Reference Clock 8k, Reference Clock 8192k

Default Value: Local Oscillator

Startup Margin 2 to 15 dB

Default Value: 0 dB

The Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) relates how much stronger a signal is than the background noise. The SNR startup margin is used during rate negotiation.

Asym. PSD Rate Asym R1 Enable, Rate Asym R2 Enable, Rate Asym R1 Disable

Default Value: Rate Asym. R1 Disable

The Power Spectral Density (PSD) provides the amount of power applied to the spectrum of frequencies that carry the information signal in order to achieve a satisfactory level of signal strength at the receiving end of the circuit. The asymmetric PSD selects power spectral density masks.

Line Probe Enable Adaptive Rate, Fixed Rate

Default Value: Adaptive Rate

The line probe parameter is enabled in two options: Adaptive rate and fixed rate. In the adaptive rate option, the system is forced to perform a line probing in order to find the best possible rate of transmission. In the fixed rate option, the system skips the rate adaptation phase.

MinRate 200, 392, 520, 776, 1032, 1160, 1544, 2056, 2312 kbps Default Value: 200 kbps

Determines the minimum rate of transmission

MaxRate 200, 392, 520, 776, 1032, 1160, 1544, 2056, 2312 kbps

Default Value: 2312 kbps

Determines the maximum rate of transmission

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-13

DEF DATA

Format

DEF DATA

Use

1. Type: def data

2. Press <Enter>. A list of parameters is displayed for the configuration of the port. The port type is automatically recognized, and LA-110 displays the appropriate form for the definition of the data port: Frame Relay (see Figure 4-11)

AAL1 (Figure 4-12).

To change the application mode:

1. Select Physical Interface.

2. Type <F> or <B>, to change from Frame Relay application mode to AAL1 stream.

Frame Relay Mode

La-110> def port

Physical Interface: V35

Application: Frame Relay

Protocol CRC

Value 16 bit

Baud Inverted Clock

256 kbps Disable

CLLM

No

Figure 4-11. DEF DATA – Frame Relay

Table 4-4 lists the available configuration parameter values for the Data port in Frame Relay mode.

1. Define General Parameters 2. Define System Parameters 3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port Connections

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-14 Configuring Ports

Table 4-4. DEF DATA – Frame Relay

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Physical Interface

V35, V36, X21

Protocol

NONE

Q.933 network

Q.933 user

Q.933 both

T1.617 network

T1.617 user

T1.617 both

LMI network

LMI user

LMI both

Default Value: NONE

Specifies the Frame Relay link control protocol to be used on the data port.

No protocol

ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, network side

ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, user side

ITU-T Rec. Q.933, Annex A, both network and user side

ANSI T1.617, Annex D, network side

ANSI T1.617, Annex D, user side

ANSI T1.617, Annex D, both network and user side

LMI specification, network side

LMI specification, user side

LMI specification, both network and user side

Note: The protocol must be selected in accordance with the protocol used by the equipment connected to the data port.

CRC 16 bit, 32 bit

Default Value: 16 bit

Specifies the CRC polynomial to be used for error detection by the data port. The available selections are 16 BIT (CRC-16) and 32 BIT (CRC-32). The CRC parameter must be selected in accordance with the CRC mode used by the equipment connected to the data port.

Baud 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344,1408, 1472, 1536, 1600, 1664, 1728, 1792, 1856, 1920, 1984, 2048 kbps

Default Value: 64 kbps

Specifies the nominal port data rate

Inverted Clock

Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

CLLM Yes, No

Default Value: No

If the selected Protocol is not one of the LMI options, this parameter is displayed

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-15

AAL1 Stream Mode

La-110> def data

Application: AAL1 Stream

DCD&RTS Baud Inverted Clock

Obey Signals 64k Disable

If the Baud Rate or the DCD status are changed – the device will reboot.

Do you wish to save the changes? (Y/N)

Figure 4-12. DEF DATA - AAL1 Stream

Table 4-5 Lists the available configuration parameter values for the Data port in AAL1 Stream mode.

Table 4-5. DEF DATA - AAL1 Stream

Parameter Possible Values Notes

DCD&RTS Ignore Signals

Obey Signals

Default Value: Ignore Signals

Data throughput is activated automatically, regardless of the data port signal status

Data throughput obeys signal activation

Baud 64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640, 704, 768, 832, 896, 960, 1024, 1088, 1152, 1216, 1280, 1344,1408, 1472, 1536, 1600, 1664, 1728, 1792, 1856, 1920, 1984, 2048 kbps

Default Value: 64 kbps

Specifies the nominal port data rate

Inverted Clock Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-16 Configuring Ports

DEF USER

Format

DEF USER

To define User port:

1. Type: def user

2. Press <Enter>.

POTS

When the User port is Plain Old Telephone System (POTS), the displayed parameters are in accordance with the type of voice module installed. There are three types of POTS modules: FXS, ISDN and E1/T1.

The following paragraphs provide the configuration procedures for each type of POTS modules.

FXS

When the User port is FXS, the screen displayed in Figure 4-13 appears.

1. Configure the port.

2. Press <Enter>. The message in Figure 4-14 appears.

Table 4-6 lists the available configuration parameter values for the User port of FXS.

La-110> def user

FXS CONFIGURATION

Gains

Coding law Tx Rx

A Law 0 dBm -4 dBm

Figure 4-13. DEF USER – FXS

FXS port configured successfully.

Figure 4-14. DEF USER – FXS – Message

1. Define General Parameters 2. Define System Parameters 3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port Connections

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-17

Table 4-6. DEF USER – FXS

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Coding Law Default Value: A law Specifies the companding law to be used by the voice channels, for the compressing and expanding of the amplitude range of the voice signal for economical transmission.

In E1 network, the coding law in use is A law coding. In T1 network, the U Law coding is in use.

Note: This parameter cannot be configured in this mode of operation. This is a read-only field.

Gains Rx/Tx –10, –8, –6, –4, –2, 0, 2, 4, 5 dBm

Default Value: Tx: 0 dBm; Rx: –4 dBm

Determines the nominal input level of the receive (Rx) and the transmit (Tx) paths for each voice port. The input level range is -10 dBm to +5 dBm.

ISDN

There are no configuration procedures whenever the User port is an ISDN port, other than determining the Echo Canceling and Phantom of the ports (see Figure 4-15).

1. For Echo Canceling, select Enable or Disable.

2. For Phantom, select Enable or Disable.

3. Press <Enter>. The message in Figure 4-16 appears.

La-110> def user

ISDN

Port Index in the Interface: 1 2 3 4

Channel : B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 B1 B2

Echo canceling : on off on off on off on off

Phantom : Enable Enable Enable Enable

Figure 4-15. DEF USER – ISDN

ISDN port configured successfully.

Figure 4-16. DEF USER – ISDN – Message

If you change the Echo Cancellation state, the device needs to be reset. You are prompted “You must Reboot the device before the new settings will take effect. Do you want to Reboot now? (Y/N).” You can press Y or reset later on.

Note

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-18 Configuring Ports

Table 4-7. Configuration of User Port with ISDN

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Echo Canceling On, Off

Default Value: On

This technique allows for the isolation and filtering of unwanted signals caused by echoes from the user transmitted signal, in accordance with the port in the interface channel (1 to 4).

Phantom Enable, Disable

Default Value: Enable

Supplies power to the ISDN termination device (phone)

E1 Port

When the User port is E1, you must configure the port. Figure 4-17 shows the menu.

Table 4-8 lists the available configuration parameter values when the User port is E1.

La-110> def user

E1 Interface – USER side

Synchronization Idle-code

FAST (1 sec) 7e

Framing Line-code Receiver-sensitivity CRC-4

multi-frame (G732S) HDB3 30 dB ON

Signaling Sample Time

0.5 sec

Figure 4-17. DEF USER – E1

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-19

Table 4-8. Configuration of User Port for E1 Module

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Synchronization FAST (1 sec),

62411 (10 sec),

CCITT (100 msec)

Default Value: FAST (1 sec)

Rate of synchronization between LA-110 and the network interfaces. Three values are available for optimum synchronization.

Idle Code Default Value: 7e Code transmitted intermittently over the E1 when the line is idle

Framing Multiframe (G732S),

Not multiframe (G732N)

Default Value: multiframe (G732S)

Error control procedure with multiplexed digital channels where bits are inserted so that the receiver can identify the time slots that are allocated to each sub-channel. Framing is the process of adjusting the timing of the receiver to coincide with that of the received framing signals.

Line Code AMI

HDB3

Default Value: HDB3

Alternate Mark Inversion

High Density Bipolar 3

Receiver Sensitivity 30 dB, 12 dB

Default Value: 30 dB

Magnitude of the received signal necessary to produce objective BER or channel noise performance

CRC 4 ON, OFF

Default Value: ON

The Cyclic Redundancy Check process is used to check the integrity of a block of data

Signaling Sample Time 100 msec, 200 msec, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, 2.0 sec

Default Value: 0.5 sec

Note: Relevant only when Framing is Multiframe (G732S).

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-20 Configuring Ports

Def LAN The LAN port consists of a 10/100BaseT port, and is part of a Fast Ethernet module.

Format

DEF LAN

To define the LAN port:

1. Type: def lan

2. Press <Enter>.

The Fast Ethernet module has two operating modes:

• Ethernet Bridge

• Ethernet Router

LA-110 automatically detects the LAN operating mode and displays it on the Terminal screen. Each mode has different set of parameters to be configured, as shown below (see Figure 4-18 and Figure 4-19).

Ethernet Bridge Mode

Figure 4-18 shows the Ethernet Bridge Mode.

La-110> def lan

ETHERNET Interface

Application: Ethernet Bridge

Auto Negotiation Max Capability Advertised Default Type

Enable 10Base_T – half duplex mode 10Base_T – half duplex mode

Bridge Mode Aging Time Encapsulation PPPoE

Access only 5 Bridged Ethernet without CRC Disable

Figure 4-18. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Bridge Mode

Table 4-9 lists the available values of the parameters for the configuration of the LAN port in Ethernet Bridge Mode.

1. Define General Parameters 2. Define System Parameters 3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port Connections

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-21

Table 4-9. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Bridge Mode

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Auto Negotiation Enabled, Disabled

Default Value: Enabled

Enables automatic configuration with external equipment connected to the LAN port

Max Capability Advertised 10BASE _T – half duplex mode

10BASE _T – full duplex mode

100BASE _T – half duplex mode

100BASE _T – full duplex mode

Default Value: 10BASE _T

This parameter uniquely identifies the set of capabilities of the local auto-negotiation entity

Default Type 10BASE _T – half duplex mode

10BASE _T – full duplex mode

100BASE _T – half duplex mode

100BASE _T – full duplex mode

Default Value: 10Base _T

This parameter represents the administratively- configured type of the Fast Ethernet Controller (FEC) in LA-110. If auto-negotiation is not enabled or is not implemented for this FEC, the value of this parameter determines the operational type of the FEC. In this case, setting this parameter will force the FEC into the specified operating mode.

If auto-negotiation is implemented and enabled for this FEC, the operational type of the FEC is determined by auto-negotiation, and the value of this parameter denotes the type to which the FEC will automatically revert if/when auto-negotiation is later disabled.

Note: This field is valid only when the Auto Negotiation mode (above) is disabled.

Bridge Mode Access only, Access & switching

Default Value: Access only

Selects the processing mode for Ethernet port traffic

Aging Time As selected, in minutes

Default Value: 5 min.

provides the timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically-learned forwarding information

Encapsulation Bridged Ethernet without CRC

Bridged Ethernet with CRC

Default Value: Bridged Ethernet without CRC

defines encapsulation type requested for the Ethernet interface. It indicates if we transfer the Ethernet frame to the other side with or without CRC

PPPoE Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

Determines the Point-to-Point protocol over Ethernet

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-22 Configuring Ports

Ethernet Router Mode

Figure 4-19 shows the LAN as a router.

La-110> def lan

ETHERNET Interface

Application: Ethernet Router

Auto Negotiation Max Capability Advertised Default Type

Enable 10BASE_T – half duplex mode 10BASE_T half duplex mode

IP Mask

255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255

Aging Time Timeout RIP

5 min 1 sec None

DHCP Relay: Disable

Figure 4-19. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Router Mode

Table 4-10 lists the available configuration parameter values for the LAN port in Ethernet Bridge Mode.

Table 4-10. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Router Mode

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Auto Negotiation Enabled, Disabled

Default Value: Enable

Enables automatic configuration with external equipment connected to the LAN port

Max Capability Advertised 10BASE _T – half duplex mode

10BASE _T – full duplex mode

100BASE _T – half duplex mode

100BASE _T – full duplex mode

Default Value: 100BASE _T full duplex mode

This parameter uniquely identifies the set of capabilities of the local auto-negotiation entity.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-23

Table 4-10. Configuration of LAN Port in Ethernet Router Mode (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Default Type 10BASE _T – half duplex mode

10BASE _T – full duplex mode

100BASE _T – half duplex mode

100BASE _T – full duplex mode

Default Value: 10BASE _T half duplex mode

If auto-negotiation is implemented and enabled for this FEC, the operational type of the FEC is determined by auto-negotiation, and the value of this parameter denotes the type to which the FEC will automatically revert if/when auto-negotiation is later disabled.

Note: This field is valid only when the Auto Negotiation mode (above) is disabled.

IP Default Value: IP address Provides the IP address

Mask Default Value: IP mask Provides the IP mask

Aging Time As selected, in minutes

Default Value: 5 min.

Provides the timeout period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information

Timeout 1–10 sec.

Default Value: 1 sec.

Determines the timeout of the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to obtain the physical address when only the logical address is known

RIP RIP1, RIP2, RIP1 & RIP2, None

Default Value: None

Determines the Routing Information Protocol to measure the shortest path between two points on the network

DHCP Enable, Disable

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-24 Configuring Ports

DEF SP PORT LA-110 includes in its rear panel a CONTROL port for unit supervision (SP) and administration from a terminal.

Purpose

Defines the communication parameters of the CONTROL DCE port.

Format

DEF SP PORT

Use

1. Type: def sp port

2. Press <Enter>. The supervisory port parameters data form are displayed. A typical form is shown in Figure 4-20.

3. Change the parameter values, as required, and press <Enter> once to end the command.

4. Press <Enter> again to initialize the supervisory port with the new values.

The Def SP Port parameters are described in Table 4-11.

LA110> def sp port

Baud Data Parity Log-off-time Pop-alarm

auto 8 none 10 yes

Figure 4-20. DEF SP PORT

Table 4-11. DEF SP PORT

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Baud Auto, 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps

Default Value: Auto

Selects the supervisory port data rate.

If auto (Autobaud operation) is selected, LA-110 automatically identifies the supervisory port data rate. To enable positive identification, the transmission must start with three consecutive carriage returns.

Data 7, 8 data bits

Default Value: 8

Selects the number of data bits in the word format

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port

Connections

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters

Configuring Ports 4-25

Table 4-11. DEF SP PORT (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Parity

Odd

Even

None

Default Value: None

Controls the use of parity:

Odd parity

Even parity

Parity disabled

Log-off-time 1 to 99

Default Value: 10

Idle disconnect time. The session will automatically be disconnected after the specified number of minutes if no input data is received by LA-110 supervisory port.

Pop Alarm

Yes

No

Default Value: No

Controls the automatic display of alarms on the terminal:

The terminal automatically displays any new alarm (ON/OFF or EVENT), or change in the state of an ON/OFF alarm

The automatic display feature is disabled

You can use the DSP SP PORT command to display the current CONTROL DCE port parameters. See Chapter 8.

Chapter 4 Configuring System Parameters LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

4-26 Configuring Ports

Introduction 5-1

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration This chapter describes the procedures for the configuration of the connections to the ports in LA-110.

5.1 Introduction

Plug-and-play LA-110 includes a plug-and-play feature that automatically defines ports in the unit, and configures their connections to the users. However, this feature is not always available and sometimes you may want to monitor and ensure that the proper connections have been performed.

This feature is relevant only for FXS/ISDN.

The following procedures provide the necessary procedures for the configuration of the connections to LA-110.

General Procedure LA-110 configuration procedures are performed in three consecutive steps:

1. Define general parameters.

2. Define the system parameters (def sysparams).

3. Configure the physical parameters of each port (def user/data/network/lan).

4. Add connection to configure the connection of each port (add conn user/data/lan).

1. There are no connection procedures for uplink connections. 2. If you select the uplink for connection definition, the terminal displays an error

message.

Figure 5-1 shows the configuration process.

Notes

Note

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-2 Introduction

Define Each Connection ParameterCommand Line: ADD CONN USERCommand Line: ADD CONN LANCommand Line: ADD CONN DATACommand Line: ADD BUNDLE (for E1/T1 module only-in User)

CONFIGURATION PROCEDURES

DEFINE GENERAL PARAMETERS

CONFIGURE THE PORTS PHYSICAL PARAMETERS

Define the Network, LAN, Data, and User PortsCommand Line: DEF NETWORKCommand Line: DEF LANCommand Line: DEF DATACommand Line: DEF USER

CONFIGURE EACH CONNECTION

DEFINE THE SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Configure the Adaptation Layer and other TransmissionParametersCommand Line: DEF SYSPARAMS

Command Line: DEF CLOCKCommand Line: DEF DATECommand Line: DEF TIMECommand Line: DEF NAME

Figure 5-1. LA-110 Connections Configuration

• General Parameters – explained in Chapter 3

• System Parameters – explained in Chapter 4.

• Port Physical Parameters – explained in Chapter 4.

• Connection of each port – explained in this chapter.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-3

5.2 Configuring Port Connections

General This section shows how to add a new connection to one of the LA-110 ports, and to specify the parameters required to set up this connection. These definitions determine the transmission parameters to the ports.

The ADD CONN command enables you to determine the connection to the data/lan/voice ports in LA-110, and specifies the parameters required to set up this connection.

The configuration set of parameters displayed by this command depends on the port type (data or analog voice). La-110 automatically recognizes the port type and displays the appropriate parameters.

The ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) characteristics, and the configuration procedures of the system in accordance with the type of AAL are described in Adaptation Layer Characteristics in .

Three types of AAL protocols can be defined in LA-110:

• AAL1 for CBR (Constant Bit Rate) transfer in ATM.

• AAL2 for CBR transfer in ATM.

• AAL5 for UBR (Undefined Bit Rate) /VBR (Variable Bit Rate) /CBR transfer in ATM (Data port in Frame Relay mode only).

LA-110 detects the type of ATM Adaptation Layer, either AAL1 or AAL2. The configuration steps are different for AAL1 and for AAL2, as shown in Figure 5-2.

The following paragraphs provide the procedures for the configuration of the connections to the ports in LA-110.

Figure 5-2 shows the how the connections configuration is performed differently for the User port, Data port, and the LAN 10/100BaseT port.

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Port

Connections

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-4 Configuring Port Connections

NetworkNo definition of

UplinkConnectionsE1/T1, xDSL

User

POTSISDNE1/T1

AddingConnections

Data

ISDN AAL2

AAL2: only

E1

- Frame Relay (AAL5)- AAL1 Stream

POTS:FXS

Available I/O Portsin Rear Panel

ConnectionsConfiguration

Command Line:add conn useradd conn data

AAL1: CESDBCESTransparent

AAL2:

- Ethernet Bridge- Ethernet Router

LAN

Command Line:add conn lan

Figure 5-2. Adding Connections Procedures

ADD CONN DATA

The connection parameters include selections that affect the utilization of the main link bandwidth. Therefore, it is recommended to refer to Traffic Parameters in Frame Relay Transmission in this section for relevant guidelines.

The connection parameters also depend on the data port application mode: Frame Relay or AAL1 Stream. The application mode is selected by means of the DEF DATA command (see DEF DATA in Chapter 4).

Format

ADD CONN DATA

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Data

Port Connections

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-5

Use

1. Type: add conn data

2. Press <Enter>.

LA-110 automatically assigns an index to the new connection; the index is used internally for managing the list of connections. This number must be used by all the commands that refer to a specific connection.

A list of parameters is displayed for the configuration of the connection to the port. These parameters are dependent upon the data port application mode:

• Frame Relay (AAL5)

• AAL1 Stream

The following paragraphs provide the different sets of parameters to be defined, in accordance with the data port application mode.

Frame Relay

The following paragraphs provide the configuration parameters for the definition of the connections to the Data interface. The total number of lines depends on the selections made for certain parameters. A typical first line is shown in Figure 5-3. Set a value for each parameter displayed.

LA110> add conn data

DLCI VPI.VCI Interworking Active

Value 0.0 Service On Figure 5-3. ADD CONN DATA– Frame Relay

Table 5-1 lists the available values of the parameters for the connections to a data port in Frame Relay mode.

Table 5-1. ADD CONN DATA – Frame Relay

Parameter Possible Values Notes

DLCI 16–991 (DLCI's 0 to 15 and 992 to 1024 are reserved)

Default Value: As selected

Specifies the Frame Relay user's DLCI (Data Link Connection Identifier) for which the new connection will be used

Note: Since only one connection may be set up for each DLCI, one is not permitted to specify a DLCI currently used by another connection.

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

Note

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-6 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-1. ADD CONN DATA – Frame Relay (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection

Note: In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM connection, therefore one cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection, even if the other connection is on another LA-110 port. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved. This also applies to a connection using the service-interworking mode. However, when the connection-interworking mode is network, you can make it form a many-to-one connection by using its VPI.VCI pair by subsequent network connections on the same port. In this case, the traffic control parameters of the new connection are determined by those defined for the first connection using this VPI.VCI pair.

Interworking Service, Network

Default Value: Service

Specifies the interworking function performed by the LA-110 in accordance with the Frame Relay equipment connected to the Data port:

• Service: LA-110 operates in the service-interworking mode. In this mode, LA-110 enables Frame Relay equipment to communicate with ATM equipment. For a description of the specific parameters available in this mode, see below.

• Network: LA-110 operates in the network-interworking mode. In this mode, LA-110 enables Frame Relay equipment to communicate with other Frame Relay equipment over an ATM network. For a description of the specific parameters available in this mode, refer below.

Active On, Off Used to select the state of the new connection, active (On) or not active (Off).

Service Mode

If Interworking = Service Mode, the following parameters are displayed for configuration (see Figure 5-4).

LA110> add conn data

FECN Mode DE<->CLP

Convert Transparent Convert

Figure 5-4. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-7

Press <Enter>, The third line of the data form appears. This line is used to specify the ATM continuity check (CC) functionality, and the ATM traffic type and handling methods. A typical line is shown in Figure 5-5.

Cont Check Bit-rate Allocated Buffers

Off two way VBR 50

Figure 5-5. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode – Cont.

The parameters are listed in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode

Parameter Possible Values Remarks

FECN

EFCI=0

Convert

Default Value: Convert

Specifies the method used to convert the forward explicit congestion notification (FECN) information to the congestion indication (CI) bit, or the explicit forward congestion indication (EFCI) bit, to be inserted in the ATM cells.

Ignore the FECN bit received from the Frame Relay equipment connected to the data port, and always set the EFCI bit to 0.

In the receive path, the EFCI/CI bit is derived from the received FECN bit.

Mode

Translation

Transparent

Default Value: Transparent

Specifies the protocol handling method

LA-110 converts the encapsulation header from the format required by RFC 1490 (Frame Relay) to the format of RFC 1483 (ATM)

LA-110 transparently transfers the encapsulation header

DE<->CLP

0

1

Convert

Default Value: Convert

Specifies the method used to derive the discard eligibility (DE) bit for the Frame Relay equipment connected to the LA-110 data port, and the cell loss priority (CLP) bit for the ATM network

Always set the CLP and DE bits to 0

Always set the CLP and DE bits to 1

In the receive path, the DE bit is derived from the CLP bit received from the ATM network (if one of the cells carries CLP = 1, the DE will be set to 1). In the transmit path, the CLP bit is derived from the DE bit received from the Frame Relay equipment

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-8 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-2. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Remarks

Cont Check

Off two-way

On-source

On-sink

On two-way

Off-sink

Off-source

Default Value: Off two-way

Specifies the initial method used for a new connection to perform continuity checks on the ATM network interface. This continuity check is implemented by using an OAM F5 loopback test.

The Continuity Check function will be disabled, i.e. LA-110 will not transmit, nor expect to receive, CC cells from the ATM network

When there is no payload traffic on this connection, LA-110 will transmit CC cells toward the ATM network, but does not expect to receive CC cells from the ATM network. This enables the remote equipment to monitor the continuity of the transmit path, from LA-110 to the network, on the new connection.

LA-110 will not transmit, but expects to receive, CC cells from the ATM network. If there is no payload traffic, and no CC cells were received during the last three seconds, LA-110 will declare a loss-of-continuity fault, and start transmitting receive defect indication (RDI) cells on the VCC used by this connection. This enables LA-110 to monitor the continuity of the receive-from-ATM network path.

During periods without payload traffic, LA-110 transmits and expects to receive CC cells from the ATM network. The response in case the new connection does not carry payload traffic, and no CC cells are received, is described above.

The monitoring of CC cells from the ATM network during idle periods will be stopped

The transmission of CC cells toward the ATM network during idle periods will be stopped. The selection made by you during the definition of the new connection can be changed on-line as a result of the reception of continuity check activation/deactivation cells from the ATM network.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-9

Table 5-2. ADD CONN DATA – Service Mode (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Remarks

Bit Rate

CBR

VBR

UBR

Default Value: VBR

Specifies the method and parameters used to handle the traffic on the connection

Constant Bit Rate, intended for real-time applications that require constant bandwidth and tightly constrained delay and delay variation

Variable Bit Rate service, intended for applications that require constraints on the maximum delay and delay variation such as video or voice

Unspecified Bit Rate service, intended for non-real-time applications which do not require tightly constrained delay and delay variation, e.g. data communications applications such as file transfer or e-mail

Allocated Buffers

10 to 217

Default Value: 50

The parameters control the operation of the selected algorithm, thus their effect depends on the selected traffic descriptor. For example, for a CBR connection, the only parameter required for traffic control is the PCR value, which is automatically set to the value corresponding to the nominal data rate of that connection. The conversion between cell rates and bit rates is explained in the Selection of Traffic Parameters section below. For a VBR connection, the PCR value is interpreted as a limit on the data rate that will be accepted (from the user or from the ATM network) for that connection.

UBR

UBR is a best-effort service therefore, for UBR no additional parameters are needed. The VBR and CBR services require you to select specific traffic handling parameter values.

VBR

If VBR is selected, a data form for selecting the traffic control parameters for the new connection appears. The screen is shown in Figure 5-6.

MBS PCR SCR

1 10 10

Figure 5-6. ADD CONN DATA – VBR

The parameters are listed in Table 5-3.

Note

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-10 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-3. ADD CONN DATA – VBR

Parameter Possible Values Remarks

MBS 1 to 999 cells

Default Value: 1

Specifies the Maximum Burst Size to be accepted

SCR 10 to 5452 cells per second

Default Value: 10

Sustained Cell Rate

PCR 10 to 5452

Default Value: 10

Peak cell rate: depends on network port, connection configuration, and xDSL synchronization rate

CBR

If CBR is selected, the line shown in Figure 5-7 appears.

PCR

10

Figure 5-7. ADD CONN DATA – CBR

The values for PCR are dependant on the interface:

• SHDSL: 10 to 5453

• ADSL: 10 to 2415

• E1: 10 to 4528.

Default Value: 10

Press <Enter> after entering the last parameter value to execute the command.

LA-110 does not support all values of SCR (for VBR) or PCR (for CBR), therefore the value selected by the user will be rounded to the nearest value supported.

Network Mode

A typical second line of the connection data form, seen when the Network Interworking Mode is selected, is shown in Figure 5-8.

FR-SSCS-DLCI DE->CLP CLP->DE

Value Convert Conv-DE & CLP

Figure 5-8. ADD CONN DATA – Network Mode

The parameters are listed in Table 5-4.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-11

Table 5-4. ADD CONN DATA – Network Mode

Parameter Possible Values Notes

FR-SSCS-DLCI 16–991 (DLCI's 0 to15 and 992 to 1024 are reserved)

Default Value: As selected

Specifies the value of the DLCI to be used at the far end of the link, to complete the connection

DE->CLP CLP=0: The CLP bit is always set to 0

CLP=1: The CLP bit is always set to 1

Convert: The CLP bit is derived from the DE bit received from the frame relay equipment connected to LA-110

Default Value: Convert

Specifies the method used to derive the cell loss priority (CLP) bit to be sent in the ATM network cells, from the DE bit of Frame Relay frames

Note: In any case, the original DE bit is also mapped to the DE-FR-SSCS bit in the Frame Relay service-specific convergence sublayer (SSCS) protocol data units (PDUs) sent through the ATM network.

CLP->DE Conv-DE-only: only the DE-FR-SSCS bit received from the remote end in frame relay SSCS PDUs determines the DE bit

Conv-DE & CLP: The DE bit is derived from both the CLP and the DE-FR-SSCS bits

Default Value: Conv-DE & CLP

Specifies the method used to derive the discard eligibility (DE) bit sent to the frame relay equipment connected to LA-110, using the CLP bit carried by the ATM cells, and the DE-FR-SSCS bit received in Frame Relay SSCS PDUs

Press <Enter>, and the next line of the connection data form appears. The line is used to specify the ATM continuity check (CC) functionality, and the ATM traffic type and handling methods. A typical line is shown in Figure 5-9.

Cont Check Bit-Rate Allocated Buffers

Off two-way UBR 50

Figure 5-9. ADD CONN DATA – Network Mode–Cont.

This line and the following lines are identical to the lines displayed when the Service Mode is selected. See above for a description of the available parameters in the following lines.

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-12 Configuring Port Connections

A difference between the Service and Network Interworking modes is that in the latter mode it is possible to define many-to-one connections. For many-to-one connections, the traffic control parameters of the VCC are defined during the definition of the first connection using that VCC. Therefore, any selections made in the traffic control section of all the other connections added to the VCC are ignored, and the many-to-one connection uses the originally defined traffic control parameters.

Traffic Parameters in Frame Relay Transmission

During the selection of parameters for a new connection, you must select the traffic control parameters, and in particular the parameters that define the bandwidth requirements: PCR (Peak Cell Rate), and where applicable, SCR (Sustainable Cell Rate), and MBS (Maximum Burst Size). The values to be assigned to these parameters must be selected so as to meet the requirements of the application that will use the new connection.

In addition, when selecting the traffic parameters, the PCR and SCR values assigned to other connections, including connections serving other ports, must also be taken into account. The reason for this is that all the connections share the same transmission link, that is, LA-110 main link.

The maximum ATM payload carrying capacity (bandwidth) of the E1 main link is 1920 kbps (the payload capacity of 30 time slots, irrespective of the framing mode, G732N or G732S), but only 48 out of every 53 bytes can carry the user's payload. The 5 bytes inserted before every 48-payload bytes carry the ATM cell header.

Therefore, the maximum ATM cell rate supported by an E1 link (taking into account the nominal data rate and the ATM cell size of 53 bytes, or 424 bits) is limited to 4528 cells per second.

No information should be lost, as long as the average data rate of all the users does not exceed the available main link bandwidth.

AAL1 Stream Mode

The AAL1 Stream mode can be selected only for the Data port. When defined as AAL1 Stream the port transfers the data transparently and only one connection can be defined on the port.

The configuration data form for the connection to a data port configured in AAL1 Stream mode includes one line of parameters (see Figure 5-4). Set a value for each parameter displayed.

Rx Bytes Tx Bytes

VPI.VCI Per Cell Per Cell Cont Check Active

Value 47 47 Off two-way On

Figure 5-10. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Mode

Table 5-5 lists the parameters for AAL1 Stream Mode.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-13

Table 5-5. ADD CONN DATA – AAL1 Stream Mode

Parameter Possible Values Notes

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection

Notes:

• The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM connection, therefore you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection, even if that connection is defined on another port of LA-110-E1/T1.

• The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 will be reserved.

Rx Bytes Per Cell 10–47 bytes

Default Value: 47

Number of data bytes in the cells received

Tx Bytes Per Cell 10–47 bytes

Default Value: 47

Number of data bytes to fill in a cell before transmitting it

Cont Check Default Value: Off two-way Defines whether and in which direction the OAM continuity check is activated on the VC

Active

On

Off

Default Value: On

Used to select the state of the new connection

Active

Not active

DEL CONN DATA

Purpose

Deletes a selected connection defined on the Data port.

You can use the DSP CONN DATA command to display the list of connections defined on the specified port, and find the index of the connection to be deleted (refer to Chapter 8).

Format

DEL CONN DATA

Use

1. Type: del conn data

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter the desired connection number (see Figure 5-11).

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure Data

Port Connections

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-14 Configuring Port Connections

3. Type the desired connection number, and then press <Enter>. LA-110 displays the parameters of the deleted connection, and a confirmation message. Typical screens for the various data port interfaces and application modes are shown below.

See Figure 5-12 for a typical data port using the Frame Relay application mode with a connection using the Network Interworking Mode.

Index :

Figure 5-11. DEL CONN DATA

Inter- FR-SSCS - Cont

Index DLCI VPI.VCI DE->CLP CLP->DE working DLCI Check

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 100 4. 5 convert conv-DE-&-CLP network 111 on-sink

Bit Time-Since-

Index Mode FECN rate SCR PCR MBS Last-Change Active

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

2 ---- ---- aggregate --- --- --- 0:28:49 on

Connection number 2 on port 1 was deleted

Figure 5-12. DEL CONN – Network Mode

See Figure 5-13 for a typical data port in the Frame Relay application mode with a connection using the Service Interworking Mode.

Inter- FR-SSCS - Cont Index DLCI VPI.VCI DE->CLP CLP->DE working DLCI Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 124 3. 44 convert convert service ---- on-sink Bit Time-Since- Index Mode FECN rate SCR PCR MBS Last-Change Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 transparent convert aggregate --- --- --- 0:30:04 on Connection number 2 on port 1 was deleted

Figure 5-13. DEL CONN – Service

See Figure 5-14 for a typical data port in the AAL1 Stream application mode.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-15

Rx Tx bytes/ bytes/ Time Since Index VPI.VCI cell cell Active Last Change -------------------------------------------------------------- 1 5. 12 47 47 on 0:00:06 Connection number 1 on port 1 was deleted

Figure 5-14. DEL CONN –AAL1

ADD CONN USER LA-110 connections definition procedures for its User port are performed in accordance with:

• Type of port installed

POTS with the FXS module

ISDN

E1.

• Type of the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL1 or AAL2)

ISDN has only AAL2.

• Connection type of the port (for AAL1)

CES - Circuit emulation service, for supporting Constant Bit Rate (CBR) traffic over ATM networks

DB-CES - Dynamic bandwidth - Circuit emulation service, for supporting Constant Bit Rate (CBR) traffic but with idle when no data is transmitted over ATM networks

Transparent - to make the transportation of information invisible to the user. The port transfers the data transparently and only one connection can be defined on the port

Format

ADD CONN USER

Use

1. Type: add conn user

2. Press <Enter>.

1. LA-110 automatically assigns an index to the new connection; the index is used internally for managing the list of connections. This number must be used by all the commands, which refer to a specific connection.

2. In FXS and ISN, the user manages the connection by the port number, not the index.

Notes

Note

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-16 Configuring Port Connections

The following paragraphs provide the necessary procedures for the definition of the connection to the User port.

LA-110 automatically detects the communication identification of the port and displays the appropriate Adaptation Layer (AAL1 or AAL2) parameters.

FXS – AAL1 and AAL2

xFXS has 4 ports that must each be configured. Therefore the configuration procedures must be repeated four times, one for each port.

1. Select the configuration parameters.

2. Press <Enter>. A confirmation message appears: The connection was added successfully.

LA110> add conn user

FXS INTERFACE

Adaptation layer: AAL 2 (READ ONLY)

Port Index in the Interface:

CID: 0

VPI.VCI Cont Check Active

0.0 off two-way On

Figure 5-15. ADD CONN USER – FXS

Table 5-6 lists the available values of the parameters for the FXS Module, with AAL2 and CAS/CCS connection configuration.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-17

Table 5-6. ADD CONN USER – FXS

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Port Index in the Interface 1–4

Default Value: 1

Identifies the physical port in the module interface. The ports are identified through their number, 1 to 4. Physical port 1 is the first from right in Module FXS when you face the LA-110 front panel.

To configure another port in the FXS module: Use the <F> or <B> keys to scroll between ports 1–4.

CID 0–255

Default Value: 0

Channel Identification (CID) serves to identify a channel and all the fields of information associated with it. The value depends on the Application Identifier in the def sysparams command.

Note: This field, if the setting is static (without ELCP), can be configured in all modules. If the setting is dynamic (with ELCP), the field cannot be configured and is set through the SYSPARAMS command.

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection.

Note: In AAL2 a number of connections can be configured with the same VPI.VCI values but different CID values.

Continuity Check Off two-way, On-source, On-sink, On two-way, Off-sink, Off-source

Default Value: Off two-way

Specifies the initial method used for a new connection to perform continuity checks on the ATM network interface. This continuity check is implemented by using an OAM F5 loopback test.

Active

On

Off

Default Value: On

Selects the initial state of the new connection

Active

Not active

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-18 Configuring Port Connections

ISDN – AAL2

Only AAL2 is available for the ISDN port.

The ISDN port has four ports that must each be configured. Therefore the configuration procedures must be repeated four times, one for each port (see Figure 5-16).

If the adaptation layer is AAL1, and you enter the <ADD CONN USER> for the ISDN module, an error message is returned.

1. Configure each parameter.

2. Press <Enter>. The confirmation screen shown in Figure 5-17 appears.

Table 5-7 lists the parameters for the ISDN User port configuration.

LA110>add conn user

ISDN INTERFACE

Adaptation Layer: AAL2 (READ ONLY)

Port Index in the Interface: 1 (Port number)

VPI.VCI Cont Check Active

0.0 off two-way On

ISDN CHANNELS

D Channel:

CID: 0

B1 Channel:

CID: 0

B2 Channel:

CID: 0

Figure 5-16. ADD CONN USER – ISDN

1. CID only appears when Application Identifier in def sysparams is CAS without ELCP.

2. When the Application ID is not CAS without ELCP, the CID is dynamic, and is received from the Voice Gateway.

Note

Note

Notes

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-19

D Channel :

The connection was added successfully.

B1 Channel :

The connection was added successfully.

B2 Channel :

The connection was added successfully.

Figure 5-17. Connection Was Added Successfully Message

Table 5-7. ADD CONN USER – ISDN

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Port Index in the Interface 1–4

Default Value: 1

Identifies the physical port in the module interface. The ports are identified through their number: 1 to 4. Physical port 1 is the first from right in Module ISDN when you face the LA-110 front panel.

Note: To configure another port in module ISDN: Use the <F> or <B> keys to scroll between ports 1–4.

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0.

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection

Continuity Check Off Two-Way, On-Source, On-Sink, On Two-Way, Off-Sink, Off-Source

Default Value: Off-two-way

Specifies the initial method used for a new connection to perform continuity checks on the ATM network interface. This continuity check is implemented by using an OAM F5 loopback test.

Active Default Value: On Selects the initial state of the new connection, active (On) or not active (Off)

ISDN Channels Module ISDN requires configuring the B and D channels that are fundamental components of the ISDN interface.

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-20 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-7. ADD CONN USER – ISDN (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

D Channel - CID 0–255

Default Value: 0

The “data” (D) channel is used to carry control signals and customer call data in a packet switched mode. The D channel runs at 64 kbps. It provides the signaling information for each of the 23 voice channels (referred to as “B” channels).

Channel Identification (CID) serves to identify the channel and all the fields of information associated with it. The value depends on the Application Identifier in the def sysparams command.

B1 Channel - CID 0–255

Default Value: 0

The “bearer” (B) channel carries 64 kbps in both directions, is circuit switched and is able to carry either voice or data. B1 reflects the number of the called party, where originating switch 1 routes the call to number 1 switch.

Channel Identification (CID) serves to identify the channel and all the fields of information associated with it. The value depends on the Application Identifier in the def sysparams command.

B2 Channel - CID 0–255

Default Value: 0

Another “B” channel identification.

Channel Identification (CID) serves to identify the channel and all the fields of information associated with it. The value depends on the Application Identifier in the def sysparams command.

Repeat the above configuration instructions for each port in the ISDN.

E1 – AAL1

Before adding an E1 connection, you must add a bundle.

When LA-110 is set up in adaptation layer AAL1, module E1 can be configured in three connection types:

• CES

• DB-CES

• Transparent.

The following paragraphs provide the configuration parameters for the definition of the connections to the E1 interface.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-21

CES

Figure 5-18 shows the configuration parameters for the definition of the connections to the E1 interface in adaptation layer AAL1, and connection type CES.

LA110> add conn user

E1 Interface – USER Side

Adaptation layer: AAL 1

Bundle Index: 1

Connection Type: CES

Rx Bytes Tx Bytes

VPI.VCI Per Cell Per Cell Cont Check Active

0.0 47 47 off two-way On

Pointer Parity On

Signaling On

Figure 5-18. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – CES

Table 5-8 lists the parameters for E1 (AAL1 and Connection CES) configuration.

Table 5-8. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection CES

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Bundle Index For an E1 interface, a bundle consists of 12 nibbles (4 bits) and can represent 11 channels of 32 kbps compressed information plus a delta channel

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection.

Note: VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM pair connection, therefore you should not specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection defined on this LA-110. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved. You can display the list of existing connections by means of the DSP CONN SUB command.

Rx Bytes Per Cell 10–47 bytes

Default Value: 47

Selects the maximum number of payload bytes to be expected in a cell in the Receive direction

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-22 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-8. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection CES (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Tx Bytes Per Cell 10 – 47 bytes

Default Value: 47

The number of data bytes to fill in a cell before transmitting it.

In AAL1, the maximum number of payload bytes that can be inserted in one cell is 47 (some cells will include only 46 payload bytes). For a CBR connection with 2 time slots, the result is that the time required to fill one cell with payload data is approximately 3 msec. For applications that are sensitive to end-to-end delay, specifying a smaller number of payload bytes that can be inserted in a cell can reduce this inherent delay. Padding bytes are inserted to fill the cell and transmit it immediately.

Continuity Check

Off two-way

On-source

On-sink

On two-way

Specifies the initial method used for a new connection to perform continuity checks on the ATM network interface. This continuity check is implemented by using an OAM F5 loopback test.

The continuity check function will be disabled, i.e. LA-110 will not transmit, nor expect to receive, CC cells from the ATM network.

When there is no payload traffic on this connection, LA-110 will transmit CC cells toward the ATM network, but does not expect to receive CC cells from the ATM network.

This enables the remote equipment to monitor the continuity of the transmit path, from LA-110 to the network, on the new connection.

LA-110 will not transmit, but expects to receive, CC cells from the ATM network.

If there is no payload traffic, and no CC cells were received during the last three seconds, LA-110 will declare a loss-of-continuity fault, and start transmitting receive defect indication (RDI) cells on the VCC used by this connection.

This enables LA-110 to monitor the continuity of the receive-from-ATM network path.

During periods without payload traffic, LA-110 transmits and expects to receive CC cells from the ATM network. The response in case the new connection does not carry payload traffic, and no CC cells are received, is described above.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-23

Table 5-8. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection CES (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Off-sink

Off-source

Default Value: Off two-way

The monitoring of CC cells from the ATM network during idle periods will be stopped.

The transmission of CC cells toward the ATM network during idle periods will be stopped.

The selection made by you during the definition of the new connection can be changed on-line as a result of the reception of continuity check activation/deactivation cells from the ATM network.

Active On, Off

Default Value: On

Selects the initial state of the new connection, active (On) or not active (Off). You can change the state of the connection later, by means of the ACTIVATE CONN IOX command.

Pointer Parity On, Off

Default Value: On

Controls the use of parity for the AAL1 structure pointer: on (use of parity enabled) or off (use of parity disabled). Parity is used to detect errors in the pointer. The Off selection is available for compatibility with equipment that does not support pointer parity checking.

Signaling Default Value: On Selects if the time slots have signaling (yes) which should be entered, and removed from the payload of cells

DB-CES

Figure 5-19 shows the configuration parameters for the definition of the connections to the E1 interface in adaptation layer AAL1, and connection type DB-CES.

This is relevant only for CAS without ELCP.

Note

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-24 Configuring Port Connections

LA110> add conn user

E1 Interface – USER Side

Adaptation layer: AAL 1

Bundle Index: 1

Connection Type: DB-CES

Rx Bytes Tx Bytes

VPI.VCI Per Cell Per Cell Cont Check Active

1.0 47 47 off two-way On

Idle Signaling Bits

Tx Rx Pointer Parity

Other on

Figure 5-19. ADD CONN USER- E1 - AAL1 – Connection DB-CES

The description of most parameters for the configuration of module E1 (AAL1 and Connection DB-CES) is provided in Table 5-8. Table 5-9 lists the available values of the parameters that are specific to this module.

Table 5-9. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection DB-CES

Parameter Possible values Notes

Idle Signaling Bits 0 x 0 x - E&M/PLAR, x 1 0 x - FXO Loop Start, 0 x x 1 - FXS Loop Start, 1 x 0 1 - FXO Ground Start, 0 1 1 x - FXS Ground Start, 1 0 1 0 - R2, Other

Default Value: E1: Other T1:E&M

Indicate when data is not being sent. This field provides the value of the signaling that indicates which time slot in inactive (no data transmission).

The values of the A and B-bit are dependent on the type of module transmitting and its operating status.

Note: If “Other” is selected, then the Tx Idle / Rx Idle fields are displayed (see Figure 5-20).

Pointer Parity Default Value: On Controls the use of parity for the AAL1 structure pointer: on (use of parity enabled) or off (use of parity disabled). Parity is used to detect errors in the pointer. The off selection is available for compatibility with equipment that does not support pointer parity checking.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-25

Table 5-9. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection DB-CES (Cont.)

Parameter Possible values Notes

Tx Idle/Rx Idle 00, 01, 10, 11

Default Value: 01/11/01/11

Provides the bytes of idle signaling when no data is being sent. This field provides the value of the signaling that indicates which time slot in inactive (no data transmission). The values of these parameters are different for signaling and mask. Idle signaling indicates no data is being sent. Idle mask is used to filter data from being transmitted.

Note: This appears only when Idle Signaling Bits = Other.

When Idle Signaling Bits is set to Other, the Signaling Mask Screen opens (see Figure 5-20). In all other cases the Signaling Mask Screen does not appear.

Tx Idle Rx Idle Signaling Mask Signaling Mask Val Val Val Val

00 01 00 01

Figure 5-20. Idle Signaling Bits – Other

Transparent

Figure 5-21 shows the configuration screen for module E1 in the following parameters:

• Adaptation layer: AAL1

• Connection type: TRANSPARENT - to make the transportation of information invisible to the user. The port transfers the data transparently and only one connection can be defined on the port.

LA-110 transfers the encapsulation header transparently.

LA110> add conn user

E1 INTERFACE – User Side

Bundle Index: 1

Adaptation layer: AAL 1

Connection Type: TRANSPARENT

Rx Bytes Tx Bytes Connection Pointer VPI.VCI Per Cell Per Cell Cont Check Type Active Parity

0.0 47 47 off two-way On

Figure 5-21. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL1 – Connection Transparent

The description of most parameters for the configuration of module E1 (AAL1 and Connection DB-CES) is provided above (E1 DB-CES).

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-26 Configuring Port Connections

Adaptation Layer AAL2

E1 in AAL2 mode can only be configured with Application ID: CAS for POTS & DDSI for ISDN (without ELCP).

CAS/CCS

When module E1 is setup in adaptation layer AAL2, the connection type has no effect and this field is not displayed. The following figure shows the configuration parameters for the definition of the connections to the E1 interface in adaptation layer AAL2, and connection type CAS/CCS (see Figure 5-22). The type of application, either CAS or CCS, does not affect the E1 Interface screen. Refer to AAL2 in .

• Select the configuration parameters, and press <Enter>.

A confirmation message appears: The connection was added successfully.

LA110> Add conn user

E1 INTERFACE – User Side

Adaptation layer: AAL 2

Bundle Index:

CID:0

VPI.VCI Cont Check Active

0.0 off two-way On

OnHook OffHook Mask

0101 1111 1111

Figure 5-22. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL2

Table 5-10 lists the parameters for the Module E1 (AAL2) configuration.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-27

Table 5-10. ADD CONN USER – E1 – AAL2

Parameter Possible Values Notes

CID 0–255

Default Value: 0

Channel Identification (CID) serves to identify a channel and all the fields of information associated with it.

Note:If the setting is static (without ELCP), this field can be configured in all modules. If the setting is dynamic (with ELCP), the field cannot be configured and is set through the SYSPARAMS command.

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection

Continuity Check Off Two-Way, On-Source, On-Sink, On Two-Way, Off-Sink, Off-Source

Default Value: Off-two-way

Specifies the initial method used for a new connection to perform continuity checks on the ATM network interface

Active On, Off

Default Value: On

Selects the initial state of the new connection, active (on) or not active (off)

OnHook 0000–1111

Default Value: 0101

Indicates that a subscriber (user) intends to initiate a process such as “add-on”. The value of this parameter indicates its duration of 0.1 to 0.2 seconds.

OffHook 0000–1111 Default Value: 1111

Indicates that a subscriber (user) intends to terminate a process. The value of this parameter indicates its duration of 0.1 to 0.2 seconds

Mask 0000–1111 Default Value: 1111

Filters data, for example, it may be applied to the dialed digits of a call record to identify it (such as a toll free call)

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-28 Configuring Port Connections

DEL CONN USER

Purpose

Deletes a selected connection defined on the User port.

You can use the DSP CONN USER command to see the list of connections defined on the specified port, and find the index of the connection to be deleted (see Chapter 8).

Format

DEL CONN USER

Use

1. Type: del conn user

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter the desired connection number (see Figure 5-23).

3. Type the desired connection number, and then press <Enter>. LA-110 displays the parameters of the deleted connection, and a confirmation message. A typical is shown in Figure 5-23.

In FXS/ISDN versions, choose a port index, while in E1 versions choose a connection index.

LA110> del conn user

Port Index in the Interface : 2

Please wait .....

The connection on port 2 on the USER interface was deleted (D Channel )

Please wait .....

The connection on port 2 on the USER interface was deleted (B1 Channel )

Please wait .....

The connection on port 2 on the USER interface was deleted (B2 Channel )

Figure 5-23. DEL CONN USER – ISDN

For E1 and FXS there is only one line.

Note

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure User

Port Connections

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-29

LA110> del conn user

Port Index in the Interface : 2

Figure 5-24. DEL CONN USER – E1/FXS

ADD CONN LAN The Fast Ethernet module has two operating modes. The configuration of the LAN connection varies in accordance with the definition of the port (see Chapter 4):

• Ethernet Bridge

• Ethernet Router

Format

ADD CONN LAN

Use

1. Type: add conn lan

2. Press <Enter>.

Ethernet Bridge Mode

The configuration form for the connections to a LAN port in Ethernet Bridge mode is shown in Figure 5-25.

1. Configure the parameters.

2. Perform one of the following: For CBR: configure PCR

For VBR: configure SCR and MBS (see Figure 5-26).

A confirmation message appears: The connection was added successfully.

Table 5-11 lists the parameters for the connections to a LAN port in Ethernet Bridge mode.

LA110>add conn lan

Adding connection number 1 to Lan port:

VPI.VCI Bit-rate Allocated Buffers Cont Check Active

0 0 UBR 50 off-two way on

Figure 5-25. ADD CONN LAN

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure User

Port Connections

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-30 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-11. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge Mode

Parameter Possible Values Comments

VPI 0–31

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0–255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection

Note: In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM connection, therefore you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection, even if the other connection is on another LA-110 port. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.

Bit Rate

UBR

VBR

CBR

Default Value: UBR

Specifies the method and parameters used to handle the traffic on the connection.

Unspecified bit rate service, intended for non-real-time applications which do not require tightly constrained delay and delay variation, e.g. data communications applications such as file transfer or e-mail

Variable bit rate service, intended for applications that require constraints on the maximum delay and delay variation such as video or voice

Constant bit rate, intended for real-time applications that require constant bandwidth and tightly constrained delay and delay variation

Allocated Buffers 10 to 217

Default value: 50

Number of buffers allocated to a connection supporting sudden data bursts

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-31

Table 5-11. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge Mode (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Comments

Cont Check

Off two-way

On-source

On-sink

On two-way

Off-sink

Specifies the initial method used for the new connection to perform continuity checks on the LAN network interface

The continuity check function will be disabled, i.e. LA-110 will not transmit, nor expect to receive, CC cells from the LAN.

When there is no payload traffic on this connection, LA-110 will transmit CC cells toward the LAN, but does not expect to receive CC cells from the LAN network.

This enables the remote equipment to monitor the continuity of the transmit path, from LA-110 to the network, on the new connection.

LA-110 will not transmit, but expects to receive, CC cells from the LAN.

If there is no payload traffic, and no CC cells were received during the last three seconds, LA-110 will declare a loss-of-continuity fault, and start transmitting receive defect indication (RDI) cells on the VCC used by this connection.

This enables LA-110 to monitor the continuity of the receive-from-LAN network path.

During periods without payload traffic, LA-110 transmits and expects to receive CC cells from the LAN. The response in case the new connection does not carry payload traffic, and no CC cells are received, is described above.

The monitoring of CC cells from the ATM network during idle periods will be stopped.

Off-source

Default Value: Off two-way

The transmission of CC cells toward the LAN during idle periods will be stopped.

The selection made by you during the definition of the new connection can be changed on-line as a result of the reception of continuity check activation/deactivation cells from the LAN.

Active On, Off

Default Value: On

Used to select the state of the new connection, active (on) or not active (off).

UBR is a best-effort service; therefore for UBR no additional parameters are needed. The VBR and CBR services require the user to select specific traffic handling parameter values.

Note

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-32 Configuring Port Connections

VBR

Press <Enter>, you will see a data form for selecting the traffic control parameters for the new connection (see Figure 5-26).

The parameters control the operation of the selected algorithm, thus their effect depends on the selected traffic descriptor. For example, for a CBR connection, the only parameter required for traffic control is the PCR value, which is automatically set to the value corresponding to the nominal data rate of that connection.

MBS PCR SCR

1 5453 10

Figure 5-26. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge Mode – VBR

Table 5-13 lists the parameters for the connections to a LAN port in Ethernet Bridge mode - VBR. Set a value for each parameter displayed.

Table 5-12. ADD CONN LAN – Traffic Control

Parameter Possible Values Comments

MBS 1 to 999 cells Specifies the Maximum Burst Size to be accepted

SCR 10 to 4528 cells per second

Sustained Cell Rate

PCR 10 to 5453

Default Value: 10

Peak Cell Rate: depends on network port, connection configuration, and xDSL synchronization rate

CBR

Press <Enter>, you must enter a value for PCR.

Ethernet Router Mode

The screen for Ethernet Router Mode is shown in Figure 5-27and the parameters are explained in Table 5-13.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-33

LA110>add conn lan

Adding connection number 1 to Lan port:

IP Mask RIP

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 None

DHCP Relay: Enable

DHCP Server IP Address Max Hop Count

0.0.0.0 16

Encapsulation : PPP LLC MUXED

Username :

Password :

Confirm Password :

VPI.VCI Bit-rate Allocated Buffers Cont Check Active

0 7 VBR 50 off-two way on

MBS PCR SCR

1 5453 10

The connection was added successfully.

Figure 5-27. ADD CONN LAN– Ethernet Router Mode

Press < Enter> after entering the last parameter value to execute the command.

UBR is a best-effort service therefore, for UBR no additional parameters are needed.

The VBR and CBR services require the user to select specific traffic handling parameter values.

In general, the pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM connection, therefore you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection, even if the other connection is on another LA-110 port. The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved.

Notes

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-34 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-13. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Router Mode

Parameter Possible Values Notes

IP 0.0.0.0 –255.255.255.255

Default Value: 0.0.0.0

Specifies the Internet Protocol address

Mask 0.0.0.0 –255.255.255.255

Default Value: 0.0.0.0

Specifies the Internet protocol address mask

RIP None, RIP 1, RIP 2, RIP 1&2

Default Value: None

Specifies the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) to measure the shortest path between two points in the network

DHCP Relay Enable

Disable

Default Value: Disable

DHCP Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 –255.255.255.255

Default Value: 0.0.0.0

Note: Only when DHCP is Enabled.

Max Hop Count 1 to 16

Default Value: 16

Encapsulation RFC-1483, PPP VC, MUXED, PPP LLC MUXED

Default Value: RFC-1483

A technique used by layered protocols. This is a method of bridging dissimilar networks where the entire frame from one network is simply enclosed in the header used by the link-layer protocol of the other network.

User Name Enter up to 10 characters for the user name

Note: When Encapsulation is PPP VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED.

Password

Enter up to 20 characters for the password.

Note: When Encapsulation is PPP VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED.

Link Active Time 2 to 900 seconds

Default Value: 2

Specifies the minimum time the link with the network is kept

Note: When Encapsulation is PPP VC MUXED or PPP LLC MUXED.

VPI 0 to 31 Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Path Identifier to be used by the new connection

VCI 0 to 255

Default Value: 0

Specifies the ATM Virtual Circuit Identifier to be used by the new connection

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-35

Table 5-13. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Router Mode (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Bit Rate

UBR

VBR

CBR

Default Value: UBR

Specifies the method and parameters used to handle the traffic on the connection

Unspecified bit rate service, intended for non-real-time applications which do not require tightly constrained delay and delay variation, e.g. data communications applications such as file transfer or e-mail.

Variable bit rate service, intended for applications that require constraints on the maximum delay and delay variation such as video or voice

Constant bit rate, intended for real-time applications that require constant bandwidth and tightly constrained delay and delay variation

MBS 1 to 999 cells Specifies the Maximum Burst Size to be accepted

Note: This is relevant only for UBR.

SCR 10 to 4528 cells per second

Sustained Cell Rate

Note: This is relevant only for UBR.

PCR 10 to 5453

Default Value: 10

Peak Cell Rate: depends on network port, connection configuration, and xDSL synchronization rate

Note: For CBR only.

Allocated Buffers 10 to 217

Default Value: 50

Number of buffers allocated to a connection supporting sudden data bursts

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-36 Configuring Port Connections

Table 5-13. ADD CONN LAN – Ethernet Router Mode (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values Notes

Cont Check

Off two-way

On-source

On-sink

On two-way

Off-sink

Off-source

Specifies the initial method used for the new connection to perform continuity checks on the LAN network interface.

The continuity check function will be disabled, i.e. LA-110 will not transmit, nor expect to receive, CC cells from the LAN

When there is no payload traffic on this connection, LA-110 will transmit CC cells toward the LAN, but does not expect to receive CC cells from the LAN network.

This enables the remote equipment to monitor the continuity of the transmit path, from LA-110 to the network, on the new connection.

LA-110 will not transmit, but expect to receive, CC cells from the LAN.

If there is no payload traffic, and no CC cells were received during the last three seconds, LA-110/E1 will declare a loss-of-continuity fault, and start transmitting receive defect indication (RDI) cells on the VCC used by this connection.

This enables LA-110 to monitor the continuity of the receive-from-LAN network path.

During periods without payload traffic, LA-110 transmits and expects to receive CC cells from the LAN. The response in case the new connection does not carry payload traffic, and no CC cells are received, is described above.

The monitoring of CC cells from the ATM network during idle periods will be stopped.

The transmission of CC cells toward the LAN during idle periods will be stopped.

The selection made by you during the definition of the new connection can be changed on-line as a result of the reception of continuity check activation/deactivation cells from the LAN.

Active On, Off Used to select the state of the new connection, active (on) or not active (off).

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Connection Configuration

Configuring Port Connections 5-37

DEL CONN LAN

Purpose

Deletes a selected connection defined on the LAN port.

You can use the DSP CONN LAN command to see the list of connections defined on the specified port, and find the index of the connection to be deleted. See Chapter 8.

Format

DEL CONN LAN

Use

1. Type: del conn lan

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the connection (or Index) number (see Figure 5-28).

4. Press <Enter>. LA-110 displays the parameters of the deleted connection, and a confirmation message (see Figure 5-28 for Router and Figure 5-29 for Bridge).

LA110>del conn lan

Index : 001

Cont Alloc Bit Time-Since- Index VPI.VCI Check Buff Rate SCR PCR MBS Active Last-Change

1 0. 7 off-two way 50 UBR ---- ---- ---- on 0:08:37

Min Link Index IP Mask RIP Encaps Auth Act

1 177.177.177. 3 177.177.177. 4 None RFC 1483 N/A N/A

Connection number 1 on Lan port was deleted

Figure 5-28. DEL CONN LAN – Router

LA110>del conn lan

Index : 001

Cont Alloc Bit Time-Since- Index VPI.VCI Check Buff Rate SCR PCR MBS Active Last-Change

1 0. 7 off-two way 50 UBR ---- ---- ---- on 0:08:37

Connection number 1 on Lan port was deleted

Figure 5-29. DEL CONN LAN – Ethernet Bridge

1. Define General Parameters

2. Define System Parameters

3. Define each Port 4. Configure LAN

Port Connections

Chapter 5 Connection Configuration LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

5-38 Configuring Port Connections

Introduction 6-1

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands This chapter provides a description of supervision commands, and their parameters.

6.1 Introduction

LA-110 includes three sets of commands:

• General Configuration Commands – (see Table 6-1)

• Supervision Commands (see Table 6-2)

• Control Commands (see Table 6-3).

General Configuration Commands Table 6-1 lists LA-110 general configuration commands; the commands are listed in alphabetical order. They are described in General Parameters in Chapter 3.

Table 6-1. LA-110 General Configuration Commands

Command Purpose

DEF CLOCK Defines the source of the system clock

DEF DATE Sets the date of LA-110 internal clock

DEF NAME Defines the logical name of LA-110

DEF PASSWORD Defines a new password

DEF TERM RESET Resets the codes to 0 to clear the screen, move cursor to the right, and move cursor to the home position on the supervisory terminal

DEF TERM SET Defines the codes for clear screen, move cursor to the right, and move cursor to the home position on the supervisory terminal

DEF TIME Sets the time of LA-110 internal clock

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-2 Introduction

Supervision Commands Table 6-2 lists LA-110 supervision commands; the commands are listed in alphabetical order. They are explained in this chapter.

Table 6-2. LA-110 Supervision Commands

Command Purpose

ACTIVATE CONN DATA Changes the activation state of an existing connection defined on the Data port

ACTIVATE CONN LAN Changes the activation state of an existing connection defined on the LAN port

ACTIVATE CONN NETWORK Changes the activation state of an existing connection defined on the Network port

ACTIVATE CONN USER Changes the activation state of an existing connection defined on the User port

ADD BUNDLE Creates a bundle for a connection on the User E1 port

ADD CONN DATA Adds a new connection to Data port (Chapter 5)

ADD CONN LAN Adds a new connection to the LAN port (Chapter 5)

ADD CONN USER Adds a new connection to User port (Chapter 5)

ADD NMS Adds a new SNMP-based network management station to which LA-110 will send traps

ADD STATIC MAC ADDR NETWORK

Adds a new static MAC address (ATM side or Ethernet side) to the Network port

ADD STATIC MAC ADDR USER Adds a new static MAC address (ATM side or Ethernet side) to the User port

ADD STATIC ROUTING NETWORK

Adds static routes to the Router table for the Network port

ADD STATIC ROUTING USER Adds static routes to the Router table for the User port

DEF ADDR ATM Defines the VPI.VCI and IP address to be used to connect to LA-110 SNMP agent via the main link, and enables the connection

DEF ADDR ILMI Defines the VPI.VCI to be used to connect to LA-110 ILMI agent via the main link, and enables the connection

DEF COMMUNITY Defines the community strings for SNMP and ILMI management

DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN Defines the default gateway for the LAN port

DEF PSTN Defines Public Switched Telephone Network

DEF SP PORT Defines CONTROL DCE supervisory port parameters

DEF USER Defines the sub (CBR) port parameters (Chapter 5)

DEL BUNDLE Deletes a bundle of the connection on the E1 port

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Introduction 6-3

Table 6-2. LA-110 Supervision Commands (Cont.)

Command Purpose

DEL CONN USER Deletes an existing connection from the User port (Chapter 5)

DEL CONN LAN Deletes an existing connection from the LAN port (Chapter 5)

DEL NMS Deletes a network management station from the list of stations to which LA-110 will send traps

DEL STATIC MAC ADDR NETWORK

Deletes a static MAC address to the Network port

DEL STATIC MAC ADDR USER Deletes a static MAC address to the User port

DEL STATIC ROUTING LAN Deletes a static routing address from the Routing table for the LAN port

MOD CONN NETWORK Modifies an existing connection defined for the Network port

MOD CONN DATA Modifies an existing connection defined for the Data port

MOD CONN USER Modifies an existing connection defined for the User port

MOD CONN LAN Modifies an existing connection defined of the LAN port

MOD NMS Modifies the information for one of the currently defined network management stations

SEND LOOPBACK NETWORK Sends an OAM loopback request to test a VCC to the Network

SEND LOOPBACK USER Sends an OAM loopback request to test a VCC to the network from the User port

SEND LOOPBACK LAN Sends an OAM loopback request to test a VCC to the LAN from the LAN port

Control Commands Table 6-3 lists LA-110 control commands. They are described in Chapter 7.

Table 6-3. LA-110 Control Commands

Command Purpose

CLR ALM Clears the alarms stored in LA-110 alarm buffer

CLR PM Clears all the performance monitoring statistics stored by LA-110

EXIT Ends the current control session

HELP Displays a concise index of commands and option switches

INIT DB Loads the default configuration instead of the user configuration

LOOP Activates a test loopback

PING Sends a ping to an interface with an IP address for testing

RESET Resets LA-110

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-4 Port Connections

6.2 Port Connections

ACTIVATE CONN DATA

Purpose

Changes (toggles between ON, i.e. active, and OFF) the activation status for the existing connections defined on the Data connection. An active connection is a connection that can carry traffic.

You can use the DSP CONN DATA command to display the list of existing connections, and find the number (index) of the desired connection. See Chapter 8.

Format

ACTIVATE CONN DATA

Use

1. Type: activate conn data

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>. The Connection status (On/Off) is displayed. If you want to change the status type the command again.

LA110>activate conn data Index : 1

Connection 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF.

Figure 6-1. ACTIVATE CONN – DATA

ACTIVATE CONN USER

Purpose

Changes (toggles between ON, i.e. active, and OFF) the activation status for the existing connections defined on the User connection. An active connection is a connection that can carry traffic.

You can use the DSP CONN USER command to display the list of existing connections, and find the number (index) of the desired connection. See Chapter 8.

Format

ACTIVATE CONN USER

Use

1. Type: activate conn user

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Port Connections 6-5

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>. A message displays the new status of the specified connection (for example Figure 6-2).

LA110>activate conn user

Adaptation Layer: AAL 2

Port Index in the Interface : 1

Port 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF (D Channel ).

Port 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF (B1 Channel ).

Port 1 on the USER side was changed from ON to OFF (B2 Channel ).

Figure 6-2. ACTIVATE CONN – USER

MOD CONN DATA

Purpose

Enables to modify CONN DATA parameters.

Format

MOD CONN DATA

Use

1. Type: mod conn data

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>.

4. If the modification of the connection is performed without failure, no message is displayed to indicate the new status of the specified connection.

MODIFY CONN NETWORK

Purpose

Enables to modify CONN NETWORK parameters.

Format

MOD CONN NETWORK

Use

1. Type: mod conn network

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>.

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-6 Port Connections

4. If the modification of the connection is performed without failure, no message is displayed to indicate the new status of the specified connection.

MODIFY CONN USER

Purpose

Enables to modify CONN USER parameters.

Format

MOD CONN USER

Use

1. Type: mod conn user

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>.

If the modification of the connection is performed without failure, no message is displayed to indicate the new status of the specified connection.

ACTIVATE CONN LAN

Purpose

Changes (toggles between ON, i.e. active, and OFF) the activation status for an existing connection defined on the LAN port.

Use the DSP CONN LAN command to display the list of existing connections, and find the number (index) of the desired connection.

Format

ACTIVATE CONN LAN

Use

1. Type: activate conn lan

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter the connection index. A typical prompt is shown in Figure 6-3.

Index:

Figure 6-3. Activate Conn LAN – Index

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>. A message displays the new status of the specified connection. A typical prompt is shown in Figure 6-4.

Connection 3 on the LAN port was changed from ON to OFF

Figure 6-4. ACTIVATE CONN LAN

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Bundles 6-7

MOD CONN LAN

Purpose

Enables to modify CONN parameters.

Format

MOD CONN LAN

Use

1. Type: mod conn lan

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter the connection index. A typical prompt is shown in Figure 6-5.

3. Enter the desired connection number and then press <Enter>.

LA110>mod conn lan

Index : 1

Modifying connection number 1 on Lan port

VPI.VCI : 0.51

Bit Rate Cont Check Active

CBR off-two way on

PCR

1364

Figure 6-5. MOD CONN LAN

6.3 Bundles

ADD BUNDLE

This is relevant only for User E1 port.

Purpose

This command creates a bundle on the E1 port in User port. A bundle is a selection of timeslots. Before you add a connection to E1 in any adaptation layer configuration (AAL1 or AAL2), you must first define a bundle for the E1 interface. The minimum number of timeslots in a bundle is one; the maximum is 31 for E1.

Note

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-8 Bundles

Module E1 connections definition procedures are performed in accordance with:

• Type of the ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL1 or AAL2)

• Connection type of the port.

In AAL2 mode, a bundle can have only one timeslot.

Use the DSP BUNDLE command to display either all bundles or an individual bundle. See Chapter 8.

Format

ADD BUNDLE

Use

1. Type: add bundle

2. Press <Enter>. The index number of the bundle is displayed (see Figure 6-6).

3. Press <Tab> to move from field to field in the row. Press <F> (Forward) to change the status (yne, ywe or no) or press <B> (Backward) to return to the previous status.

The fields appearing in these lines show Transmit and Receive Time Slots.

There are 31 timeslots. Each time slot can be one of the following:

• yne: Timeslot without Echo Canceling

• ywe: Timeslot with Echo Canceling

• no: free timeslot

• n/a: the timeslot is being used by another bundle.

Adding bundle number 2:

“There are 3 options to configure the Time Slots”

Time Slot free for configure: no

Time Slot without echo canceling: yne

Time Slot with echo canceling: ywe

Transmit and Receive Time Slots

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

yne ywe yes no no no no no no no no no no no no

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

n/a no no no yes no no no no no no no no no no no

Figure 6-6. ADD BUNDLE – E1

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Bundles 6-9

DEL BUNDLE

Purpose

Deletes a bundle. A bundle is a selection of timeslots. If a connection is currently using this bundle the user is given the option to delete the connection also or else not to delete the bundle.

Format

DEL BUNDLE

Use

1. Type: del bundle

2. Press <Enter>. A prompt requests you to delete the index of the bundle (see Figure 6-7).

3. Enter the index of the bundle to be deleted. If you do not know the index, use the command DSP BUNDLE ‘all’ to display the indexes of all bundles.

4. After the index is entered, the screen shown in Figure 6-8 appears on the display.

The available timeslots are: no: Timeslot free to configure yne: Timeslot without Echo Canceling ywe: Timeslot with Echo Canceling.

Index:

Figure 6-7. DEL BUNDLE

Transmit and Receive Time Slots

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

yne ywe ywe yne yne no no no no no no no no no no

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

n/a no no no yes no no no no no no no no no no no

Figure 6-8. DEL BUNDLE – Transmit and Receive Timeslots

5. If a connection uses the bundle, the message shown in Figure 6-9 appears.

6. If you press N, then the command ends and both the bundle and connection remain unchanged. If you press Y, then a deletion message is displayed (Figure 6-10).

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-10 Network Management Station (NMS)

A connection is using this bundle and will be deleted.

Do you wish to continue ? (Y/N)

Figure 6-9. DEL BUNDLE – Connection Is Using The Bundle

Connection and bundle number 2 on the User side were deleted

Figure 6-10. DEL BUNDLE – Connection and Bundle Number Deletion Message

7. Type the desired connection number, and then press <Enter>. LA-110 displays the parameters of the deleted connection, and a confirmation message.

6.4 Network Management Station (NMS)

ADD NMS

Purpose

Defines the IP address of a new network management station (NMS), and the enterprise-specific traps that will be sent to the new network management station.

The maximum number of network management stations is 10.

Format

ADD NMS

Use

1. Type: add nms

2. Press <Enter>. A message appears that displays the index automatically assigned to the new NMS (see Figure 6-11).

3. Select the desired values, and press <Enter> to execute.

The ADD NMS parameters are described in Table 6-4.

LA110>add nms

Adding NMS number 1

IP address Link-Up & Link-Down Alarm Trap Leds-Status-Change

0.0.0.0 unmask unmask unmask

Figure 6-11. ADD NMS

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Network Management Station (NMS) 6-11

Table 6-4. ADD NMS

Parameter Possible Values Notes

IP address Enter the IP address of the network management station.

Link-Up & Link-Down

Mask

Unmask

Used to select whether to send link-up and link-down traps to this NMS:

The SNMP agent of LA-110 will not send link-up and link-down traps to this NMS

The SNMP agent of LA-110 will send link-up and link-down traps to this NMS.

Alarm Trap Unmask

Mask

Sends traps to this NMS when an alarm condition occurs

Does not send traps to this NMS when an alarm condition occurs

Leds-Status - Change Unmask

Mask

Sends traps to this NMS when LA-110 front-panel indicators change state

Does not send traps to this NMS when LA-110 front-panel indicators change state

You can use the DSP NMS command to see the parameters of the currently defined network management station See Chapter 8.

MOD NMS

Purpose

Modifies the IP address of one of the defined network management station (NMS).

Format

MOD NMS

Use

1. Type: mod nms

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Type the number of the network management station to be deleted, i.e. 1, and then press <Enter>.

4. Modify the parameters (see Figure 6-12).

5. Press <Enter>.

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-12 Network Management Station (NMS)

LA110>mod nms

Index : 001

Modifying NMS number 1

Link-Up & Link-Down Alarm Trap Leds-Status-Change

unmask unmask unmask

Figure 6-12. MOD NMS – Index Number Message

DEL NMS

Purpose

Deletes a selected network management station.

You can use the DSP NMS command to find the index of the desired network management station.

Format

DEL NMS

Use

1. Type: del nms

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter the NMS index.

3. Type the number of the network management station to be deleted, i.e. 1, and then press <Enter> (see Figure 6-13).

A confirmation message appears, such as in Figure 6-13.

A110>del nms

Index : 1

NMS number 1 was deleted.

Figure 6-13. DEL NMS – Index Number Message

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Static MAC Address 6-13

6.5 Static MAC Address

ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Purpose

Adds a static MAC address.

Format

ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Use

1. Type: add static mac addr lan

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter MAC address.

4. Select: LAN

Conn1 – Conn 8.

The screen shown in Figure 6-14 appears.

LA110>ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Adding static mac addr number 1 to Lan port:

MAC address Port/Conn

aa.bb.cc.dd.ee.ff LAN

Figure 6-14. ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Purpose

Deletes a selected static MAC address.

Format

DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Use

1. Type: del static mac addr lan

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to enter the static MAC address index. A typical form is shown in Figure 6-15.

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-14 Static Routing

LA110>del static mac addr lan

Index : 1

Static mac address number 1 on Lan port, was deleted

Figure 6-15. DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

6.6 Static Routing

ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN

Purpose

Adds static routes to the Router table for the DATA port. Up to 32 static routes can be entered for the port.

Format

ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN

Use

1. Type: add static routing lan

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select the route parameters (see Figure 6-16).

The parameters are described in Table 6-5.

LA110> add static routing lan

Add Static Routing Address Number 1 to LAN Port

Net IP Mask Metrica Port/Conn

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 lan

NextHop IP

0.0.0.0

Figure 6-16. ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Static Routing 6-15

Table 6-5. ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

Net IP The network IP, which must be a legal address of a network or station

Mask The mask of this network

Port/Conn The number of the WAN interface or LAN

Next Hop IP The IP address of the next-hop router

Note: Appears only if the Port/Conn is set to LAN.

You can use the DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN command to find the index of the desired static MAC address. See Chapter 8.

DEL STATIC ROUTING DATA

Purpose

Deletes a selected static route in the DATA port.

Format

DEL STATIC ROUTING DATA

Use

1. Type: del static routing data

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter the static route index. A typical form is shown in Figure 6-17.

LA110> del static routing lan

Static Routing Address Table

Static Port/LAN Nhop

Index IP Mask Metrica Conn. IP

-----------------------------------------------------------------

1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1 1 0.0.0.0

Static routing address number 1 on LAN port was deleted.

Figure 6-17. DELETE STATIC ROUTING LAN

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-16 ATM Address

6.7 ATM Address

DEF ADDR ATM

Purpose

Defines the VPI.VCI and IP address to be used to connect the SNMP agent of LA-110 through the Network port, and to control the state of this connection (enabled or disabled).

Enabling this connection is a prerequisite for inband management of LA-110 through the ATM network using the SNMP protocol. In addition, you should use the ADD NMS command to define the stations that will receive traps from LA-110.

Format

DEF ADDR ATM

Use

1. Type: def addr atm

2. Press <Enter>. The ATM management parameters data entry form is displayed in Figure 6-18.

The ATM Management parameters are described in Table 6-6.

LA110> def addr atm

MNGT

VPI.VCI Active IP Address

0. 0 enable 0.0.0.0

Figure 6-18. DEF ADDR ATM – Management

Table 6-6. DEF ADDR ATM – Management

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

VPI 0 to 31 Specifies the ATM virtual path identifier to be used by the SNMP agent

VCI 0 through 255 Specifies the ATM virtual circuit identifier to be used by the SNMP agent

Active Enable, Disable Used to enable or disable this management connection

IP Address Specifies the IP address used to access LA-110 SNMP agent through the main link

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

ATM Address 6-17

• The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM connection; therefore, you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection.

• The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved, and should not be used. ILMI Address

DEF ADDR ILMI

Purpose

Specifies the VPI.VCI to be used to connect the ILMI agent of LA-110 through the Network port, and controls the state of this connection (enabled or disabled).

Format

DEF ADDR ILMI

Use

1. Type: def addr ilmi

2. Press <Enter>. The ILMI management address entry form appears. A typical entry form is shown in Figure 6-19.

3. Select the desired parameters, and press <Enter> to execute.

The Def Addr ILMI parameters are described in Table 6-7.

LA110> def addr ilmi

ILMI

VPI.VCI Active

0. 16 enable

Figure 6-19. DEF ADDR ILMI

Table 6-7. DEF ADDR ILMI

Parameter Possible Values Notes

VPI 0 through 31 Specifies the ATM virtual path identifier to be used by the ILMI agent

VCI 0 through 255 Specifies the ATM virtual circuit identifier to be used by the ILMI agent

Active Enable, Disable Used to enable or disable this management connection

• The pair VPI.VCI uniquely identifies an ATM connection; therefore, you cannot specify a VPI.VCI pair already used by another connection.

• The VPI.VCI pair 0.0 is reserved, and must not be used. • The ATM Forum has defined the pair VPI.VCI 0.16.

Notes

Notes

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-18 Community

6.8 Community

DEF COMMUNITY

Purpose

Defines the community names used for SNMP and ILMI management. LA-110 supports the following communities:

• SNMP communities. LA-110 supports three types of community names:

Read-only community, from which LA-110 accepts only getRequest and getNextRequest commands.

Read-write community, from which LA-110 accepts getRequest, getNextRequest, and setRequest commands.

Trap community, to which LA-110 sends traps.

• ILMI community (up to 10 alphanumeric characters).

The SNMP communities cannot be changed in Telnet sessions.

Format

DEF COMMUNITY

Use

1. Type: def community

2. Press <Enter>. The first line of the list of SNMP and ILMI community names is displayed. The list includes four lines, which are displayed one by one by pressing <Enter>. A typical display, as seen after all the lines are displayed, is shown in Figure 6-20.

3. To change a community name, type the new community name and then press <Enter> to move to the next community (on the next line). Community names are case-sensitive.

4. After entering the desired communities, press <Enter> to execute.

SNMP read-only community: public

SNMP read-write community: private

SNMP trap community: public

ILMI community: ILMI

Figure 6-20. DEF COMMUNITY

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

Default Gateway 6-19

6.9 Default Gateway

DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN

Purpose

Defines the default gateway for a specific audio port in the LAN port.

Format

DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN

Use

1. Type: def default gateway lan

2. Press <Enter>. LA-110 displays the Default Gateway entry form (Figure 6-21).

The Default Gateway parameters are described in Table 6-8.

LA110> def default gateway lan

Port/Conn Active

LAN disable

Next Hop IP

0.0.0.0

The default gateway was defined successfully.

Figure 6-21. DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY

Table 6-8. DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

Port/Conn LAN, Conn1, Conn2, Conn3, Conn4, Conn5, Conn6, Conn7, Conn8

Index of the interface for which the user wants default routing.

For a LAN interface, add an IP address.

Active Enable, Disable

Next Hop IP The IP address of the default gateway. The address must be a network station connected to the LAN interface, but not the IP address of the LAN interface.

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-20 Printing

6.10 Loopback Tests

SEND LOOPBACK DATA

Purpose

Activates a user-controlled loopback.

Only one loopback can be activated at a time. Therefore for your convenience the activation of a new loopback automatically deactivates any previous user-controlled loopback.

Format

LOOP

Use

1. Type: loop

2. Press <Enter>. The loopback selection screen is displayed. A typical screen is shown in Figure 6-22.

3. Select: None, Remote Network, Local Data, Local User.

4. Press <Enter>.

Loopback: none

Figure 6-22. SEND LOOPBACK DATA

6.11 Printing

ACTIVATE ELCP

Purpose

Enable printing.

Format

ACTIVATE ELCP

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

File Transfer 6-21

Use

1. Type: activate elcp 2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select: Enable Printing

Disable Printing

ISDN Status

ELCP Port Status

LAPV5 Statistics

LA-110 displays the screen shown in Figure 6-23.

LA110> activate elcp

ELCP Functionality : Enable Printing

Figure 6-23. ACTIVATE ELCP

6.12 File Transfer

ACTIVATE TFTP

Purpose

Enable sending file by TFTP.

Format

ACTIVATE TFTP

Use

1. Type: activate tftp

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select: Download SW

Download Configuration

Upload SW.

LA-110 displays the screen shown in Figure 6-23.

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-22 PAT

LA110> activate TFTP

Command : Download SW

Server IP: 0.0.0.0

File : SHDSL.ROM

Please wait…

TFTP TSATUS TRANSFERRING DATA…

[...]

TFTP STATUS ENDED OK

Figure 6-24. ACTIVATE TFTP

6.13 Terminal

DEF TERM RESET

Purpose

Resets the codes used to clear the supervision terminal screen to 0, moves the cursor to the right, and returns the cursor to the home position.

Format

DEF TERM RESET

Use

1. Type: def term reset

2. Press <Enter>. This command clears the screen and moves the cursor to screen home position.

6.14 PAT

ADD PAT

Purpose

Adds Path Address Translation

Format

ADD PAT

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

PAT 6-23

Use

1. Type: add pat

2. Press <Enter>.

LA110> add pat

Adding PAT number : 1

Real IP Virtual IP Port Protocol

0.0.0.0. 0.0.0.0 User Define TCP

Min Port User Define : 0

Max Port User Define : 0

Figure 6-25. ADD PAT

Table 6-9. ADD PAT

Parameter Possible Values Remarks

Real IP 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Virtual IP 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Port User Define, Telnet (23), Web (80), FTP (20,21), SNMP (161), TFTP (69), DNS (53), SMTP (25), POP3 (110)

Protocol TCP, UDP

Depends on selected Port

User Define: TCP, UDP

Telnet: TCP

Web: TCP, UDP

FTP: TCP

SNMP: TCP

TFTP: TCP

DNS: TCP, UDP

SMTP: TCP

POP3: TCP

Min Port User Define Minumum port required for User Defined interval

Max Port User Define Maximum port required for User Defined interval

For a single port, Minimum Port and Maximum Port must be the same number.

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-24 NAT

DEL PAT

Purpose

Deletes Path Address Translation

Format

DEL PAT

Use

1. Type: del pat

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select Delete Mode: All

Individual

LA110>del pat

Delete mode : all

All Pat entries were deleted successfully.

6.15 NAT

ADD NAT

Purpose

Add Network Address Translation

Format

ADD NAT

Use

1. Type: add nat

2. Press <Enter>.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

NAT 6-25

LA110>add nat

Nat type : Single

Interface : LAN

Real IP Real Mask

177.177.177.1 255.255.255.255

Virtual IP Virtual Mask

1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0.0

Nat entry was added successfully.

Figure 6-26. ADD NAT

Virtual IP and Mask IP must be the same addresses that were defined in DEF LAN.

Table 6-10. ADD NAT

Parameter Possible Values / Notes

Nat type Dynamic, Static, Transparent, Single

Interface LAN, Conn1, Conn2, Conn3, Conn4, Conn5, Conn6, Conn7, Conn8

Real IP 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Real Mask 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Virtual IP 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

Virtual Mask 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255

DEL NAT

Purpose

Deletes NAT

Format

DEL NAT

Use

1. Type: del nat

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select Delete Mode: All

Individual

Note

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-26 DHCP

LA110>del nat

Delete mode : all

All Nat entries were deleted successfully.

Figure 6-27. DEL NAT

6.16 DHCP

ADD DHCP

Purpose

Adds DHCP

Format

ADD DHCP

Use

1. Type: add dhcp

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter values for the parameters.

4. Press <Enter>.

LA110>add dhcp

Addind DHCP Pool number 1

Lowest IP Highest IP Mask

177.177.177.10 177.177.177.20 177.177.177.2

Default Gateway

255.255.255.1

Primary DNS Secondary DNS

0 .0 .0 .0 0 .0 .0 .0

Lease Time (in minutes): 600

The DHCP Pool was added successfully!

Figure 6-28. ADD DHCP

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

DHCP 6-27

DEL DHCP

Purpose

Deletes DHCP

Format

DEL DHCP

Use

1. Type: del dhcp

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select Delete Mode: All

Individual

LA110> del dhcp

Delete mode: all

ALL DHCP Pools were successfully deleted.

Figure 6-29. DEL DHCP

DEF PSTN

Purpose

Define PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)

This is applicable only to FXS. Not used in CAS.

Format

DEF PSTN

Use

1. Type: def pstn

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select PSTN parameters (refer to Figure 6-30 and Table 6-11). The Add Duration prompt appears (see Figure 6-30 and Figure 6-31).

4. Type Y to Add Duration. If you enter any other key, the Duration parameters do not appear.

5. Select Duration parameters. The Add Duration prompt appears (see Figure 6-31).

Note

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-28 DHCP

6. Type Y to Add Duration. If you enter any other key, the Duration parameters do not appear.

The Add Rate Type prompt appears (see Figure 6-32).

7. Type Y to Add Rate Type. If you enter any other key, the Rate Type parameters do not appear.

8. Select Rate Type parameters (see Figure 6-32). The Add Attenuation Type prompt appears (see Figure 6-33).

9. Type Y to Add Attenuation Type. If you enter any other key, the Attenuation Type parameters do not appear.

10. Select Attenuation parameters to increase/decrease voice. The Configure Pulse Duration prompt appears (see Figure 6-34).

11. Select Pulse Duration parameters. The Configure Cadence Ring prompt appears (see Figure 6-35).

12. Select the Cadence Ring parameters. This determines the pattern for each pulse.

The Number of periods in the type prompt appears (see Figure 6-35).

13. Enter Number of periods in the type.

14. For each Cadence Ring type, enter Status (Enable/Disable.

15. Enter the On and Off values for each Period of Cadence Type 0.

16. Enter Number of periods in the type. The On and Off values for each Period of each Cadence Type are displayed and the Configure Digit parameters prompt appears.

17. Configure Digit parameters (see Figure 6-36).

LA110>def pstn

National Profile : France

Collision Priority : Originating

Meter Pulse Frequency : 12kHZ

Off Hook min time (ms) : 65

On Hook min time (ms) : 480

Register Recall min time (ms): 270

Add Duration? (Y) :y

Figure 6-30. DEF PSTN Dialog Box

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

DHCP 6-29

Index : 1

Duration type : 0

Signal : On Hook

Duration (ms) : 480

Status : Enable

Add Duration? (Y) :N

Figure 6-31. Duration Dialog Box

Add Rate Type? (Y) :y

Rate Type (Enable Metering IE) : 1

Pulse per hour : 60

Status : Enable

Add Rate Type? (Y) :

Figure 6-32. Rate Dialog Box

Add Attenuation Type? (Y) :

Configure Pulse Duration? (Y) :y

Index : 1

Pulse Duration Type : 0

Pulse Type : Initial Ring

Period Parameters (ms) :

on off

500 500

Status : Disable

Configure Pulse Duration? (Y) :y

Figure 6-33. Attenuation Dialog Box

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-30 DHCP

Index : 1

Pulse Duration Type : 0

Pulse Type : Reduce Battery

Period Parameters (ms) :

on off

600 500

Status : Disable

Configure Pulse Duration? (Y) :

Figure 6-34. Pulse Duration Dialog Box

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

DHCP 6-31

Configure Cadence Ring? (Y) :y

Cadence Ring Type & Status :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |Type on off on off on off on off on off |

0

1650 3300 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Number of periods in the type : 2

|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |Type on off on off on off on off on off |

1

750 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Number of periods in the type : 1

|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |Type on off on off on off on off on off |

2

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Number of periods in the type : 1

Configure Digit parameters ? (Y) :y

Figure 6-35. Cadence Ring Dialog Box

Digit parameters (ms) : On Periods Off Periods

min max min max

20 120 10 100

Inter digit time : 220

Figure 6-36. Digit Parameters Dialog Box

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-32 DHCP

Table 6-11. PSTN Parameters

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

National Profile Selects a national profile that has the default values of the specific national PSTN

France, Italy, Belgium, Germany, England, Spain, Portugal

Collision Priority When there are simultaneous calls, determines which call has priority: the originating or the terminating call

Originating, Terminating

Default Value: Originating

Meter Pulse Frequency Frequency of the pulses generated by the FXS

12 kHz, 16 kHz

Default Value: 12 kHz

Off Hook min time (ms) Time period in ms. Those loops closed before this time period are filtered out while the analog line is in On Hook

10 to 1000

Default Value: 65

On Hook min time (ms) Time period in ms. Those loops opened longer than or equal to the On Hook are detected.

10 to 1000

Default Value: 480

Register Recall min time (ms) Determines time period in ms. for Hook Flash

75 to 975

Default Value: 270

Add Duration? Y – Allows you to change On-hook min. time

Any other key does not allow you to change On-hook min. time

Index Specifies each Duration

1 to 10

Duration type Mapping from the Duration type in the RecognitionTime IE to the actual pulse generation frequency in FXS.

0 to 63

Default Value: 0

Signal Type of signal that is defined by this Duration

On-hook , Off-hook, Flash

Default Value: On-hook

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

DHCP 6-33

Table 6-11. PSTN Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Duration (ms) New Duration time, in ms.

50 – 5000

Default Value: 480

When Status is Disable, this value is not saved in the configuration

Status Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

Add Rate Type? Y – Allows you to configure Rate Type

Any other key does not allow you to configure Rate Type

Rate Type (Enable Metering IE) Mapping from the Rate type in the EnableMetering IE to the actual pulse generation frequency in FXS

1 to 127

Default Value: 1

Note: Applicable only for V5.1 Edition 2 and higher.

Pulse per hour Rate at which the FXS generates pulses to the analog line, expressed as pulses per hour

1 to 5000

Default Value: 60

Status Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

Add Attenuation Type Y – Allows you to configure Attenuation Type

Any other key does not allow you to configure Attenuation Type

Attenuation Type (Attenuation IE) Mapping from the Attenuation type in the EnableMetering IE to the actual Attenuation applied by the FXS

0 to 127

Default Value: 0

Attenuation Value (in Decibels)

Tx

Attenuation in decibels, corresponding to the value of an Attenuation value

–10, –8, –6, –4, –2, 0, 2, 4, 5

Default Value: –4

Attenuation Value (in Decibels)

Rx

Attenuation in decibels, corresponding to the value of an Attenuation value

-–10, –8, –6, –4, –2, 0, 2, 4, 5

Default Value: –4

Status Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-34 DHCP

Table 6-11. PSTN Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Configure Pulse Duration Y – Allows you to configure Pulse Duration (a mapping from a pulse duration type identifier to the actual pulse pattern)

Any other key does not allow you to configure Pulse Duration

Index Specifies each Duration

1 to 10

Pulse Duration Type Index of the Pulse Duration table

0 to 31

Default Value: 0

Pulse Type Pulse type that is associated with the Pulse Duration Type

Initial Ring – first ring of call

Meter Pulse – measure pulses

Reduce Battery – low while Off-hook

Default Value: Initial Ring

Number of Periods Number of On/Off periods pairs in the pulse pattern

User selected

Min: 1, Max: 5

Default Value: 1

Period Parameters (ms) On Duration of an On period in the pulse pattern, in ms

User selected

Min: 10, Max: 5000

Default Value: 500

Period Parameters (ms) Off Duration of an Off period in the pulse pattern, in ms

User selected

Min: 10, Max: 5000

Default Value: 500

Status Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Supervision Commands

DHCP 6-35

Table 6-11. PSTN Parameters (Cont.)

Parameter Possible Values / Remarks

Cadence Ring Type & Status Type of ring that is sounded by the phone when it receives a phone call

Type: 0 to 9

Status: Enable, Disable

Default Value: Disable (first & second cadence ring type = Enable)

Note: Cadence Ring supports up to 10 different ringing types. Each ringing type supports up to 5 different ring on / ring off periods.

Number of Periods in the Type Number of configured periods to be used on a specific cadence ring type

Min: 1, Max: 5

Default Value: 1

Cadence Type Period On/Off Min: 0 ms (in Cadence Type 1 in each country), 100 (in all other cases)

Max: 5000 ms

Default Value: 1000 ms, except if values of the specific national PSTN profile are known

Digit parameters (ms) : A pulsed digit is formed by an On-hook and an Off-hook.

On Period Time (in ms) that the FXS is in On-hook state

Min:10 to 875

Max: 25 to 900

Default Value: Min 20, Max 120

Off Period Time (in ms) that the FXS is in Off-hook state

Min:10 to 875

Max: 25 to 900

Default Value: Min 10, Max 200

Inter digit time Determines the time between digits for a sequence of digits

Min: 50

Max: 950

Default Value: 240

Value must be less than Hook Flash

Chapter 6 Supervision Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

6-36 DHCP

Commands 7-1

Chapter 7 Control Commands This chapter provides Control commands, screens, and parameters.

7.1 Introduction

LA-110 includes three sets of commands:

• General Configuration Commands (see Chapter 3)

• Supervision Commands (see Chapter 6)

• Control Commands

The control commands will be discussed in this chapter.

7.2 Commands

CLR ALM

Purpose

Clears the alarm history buffer.

Format

CLR ALM

Use

1. Type: clr alm

2. Press <Enter>.

CLR PM

Purpose

Resets all the performance monitoring counters to 0, and thus clears all the performance monitoring data stored by LA-110.

Clearing all the performance monitoring statistic data simultaneously ensures that the collection of new statistics is started simultaneously for all the counters. Therefore the collected data is always consistent.

Chapter 7 Control Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

7-2 Commands

Format

CLR PM

Use

1. Type: clr pm

2. Press <Enter>.

EXIT

Purpose

Ends the current Control session.

Format

EXIT

Use

1. Type: exit

2. Press <Enter>. If the password option is activated, the PASSWORD> prompt is displayed. Otherwise, the LA-110> prompt is displayed.

HELP

Purpose

Displays an index of the supervisory port commands and the options available for each command.

Format

H or HELP

Use

1. Type: help

2. Press <Enter>. One screen of the Help menu appears.

3. Press <Enter> to continue to the next screen.

The HELP screen includes commands to view statistics for 24 hours (f), e.g. FXS and ISDN show dsp pm user, while E1 shows dsp pm user f. This option is not relevant for FXS and ISDN. If you enter dsp pm user f you will receive an error message.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Control Commands

Commands 7-3

INIT DB

Purpose

Loads the specified set of default parameter values into the database instead of the user configuration. During the process, the connections list defined by the user is also deleted and LA-110 is reset.

This command is not available during Telnet sessions.

Format

INIT DB

Use

1. Type: init db

2. Press <Enter>. You are prompted to confirm the command. Press Y to execute, or N to cancel.

LOOP

Purpose

Activates a user-controlled loopback (see Chapter 9 for loopback descriptions).

Only one loopback can be activated at a time. Therefore for your convenience the activation of a new loopback automatically deactivates any previous user-controlled loopback.

Format

LOOP

Use

1. Type: loop

2. Press <Enter>. The loopback selection screen is displayed. A typical screen is shown in Figure 7-1.

3. Select: None, Remote Network, Local Data, Local User.

4. After the desired state is selected, press <Enter>.

Loopback: none

Figure 7-1. LOOP

CLR LOOP

Purpose

Deactivates the currently active user-initiated loopback.

Chapter 7 Control Commands LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

7-4 Commands

Format

CLR LOOP

Use

1. Type: clr loop

2. Press <Enter>.

You can also deactivate the currently active user-initiated loopback with the command LOOP; select None.

RESET

Purpose

Resets LA-110.

Format

RESET

Use

1. Type: reset

2. Press <Enter>.

You are prompted to confirm the command. Press Y to execute the reset command. To cancel the command, press N.

DEL SYSERR

Purpose

Delete errors array.

Format

DEL SYSERR

Use

1. Type: del syserr

2. Press <Enter>.

LA110>del syserr Errors array was deleted.

Figure 7-2. DEL SYSERR

Note

List of Commands 8-1

Chapter 8 Display Options The information presented in this chapter includes screens and descriptions of the Display commands.

8.1 Overview

This chapter provides detailed instructions to display the operating status and configuration parameters of LA-110. These commands are not mandatory for the functioning of LA-110.

These display commands are usually performed during the configuration and definition phase of LA-110 in order to verify that all parameters have been entered, to ensure proper operation of the unit. These commands can be performed during normal operation of LA-110 to monitor functioning. These commands do not change the operating mode of LA-110.

These instructions should be performed using a standard ASCII terminal connected to the CONTROL supervisory port. For further instructions on the Terminal, refer to Chapter 6.

Commands are provided in alphabetical order.

8.2 List of Commands

Table 8-1 lists LA-110 display commands. The list is presented in alphabetical order.

Table 8-1. LA-110 Commands

Command Purpose Options

DSP ADDR ATM Displays the VPI.VCI and IP address used to connect to the LA-110 SNMP agent via the main link, and its status (Enabled/Disabled)

DSP ADDR ILMI Displays the VPI.VCI used to connect to the ILMI agent of the LA-110 via the Uplink, and its status

DSP ALM Displays the contents of the LA-110 alarm buffer

DSP ARP TABLE DATA

DSP ARP TABLE LAN

DSP BUNDLE Displays bundles

DSP COMMUNITY Displays the community strings

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-2 List of Commands

Table 8-1. LA-110 Commands (Cont.)

Command Purpose Options

DSP CONN DATA Displays the connections currently defined in the Data port

DSP CONN LAN Displays the connections currently defined on the LAN port

DSP CONN USER Displays the connections currently defined in the User port

DSP DATA Displays the type of Data port

DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY DATA

DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN

Displays the default gateway and its operational status of the LAN port

DSP DHCP

DSP LAN Displays the parameters of the LAN port

DSP MAC ADDR DATA Displays the MAC Address of the Data port

DSP MAC ADDR LAN Displays the MAC Address of the LAN port

DSP NAT Displays NAT information

DSP NETWORK Displays the type of Network port

DSP NMS Displays the list of currently defined network management stations

DSP PAT Displays PAT information

DSP PM ATM

DSP PM CONN DATA

Displays the performance statistics of a specific connection currently defined on the Data port

DSP PM CONN USER

Displays the performance statistics of a specific connection currently defined on the User port

DSP PM CONN AAL2 Displays Performance Monitoring statistics for AAL2 connection

DSP PM CONN LAN Displays the performance statistics of a specific connection currently defined on the LAN port

DSP PM CONN OAM DATA

Displays the performance statistics for OAM cells on the Data connection

DSP PM CONN OAM LAN

Displays the performance statistics for OAM cells for the LAN port connection.

DSP PM CONN OAM USER

Displays the performance statistics for OAM cells on the User connection

DSP PM DATA Displays the performance statistics of the Data port F

DSP PM IP Displays IP Performance Monitoring on the LAN port (only in router application)

DSP PM LAN Displays the performance statistics of the LAN port F

DSP PM NETWORK Displays the performance statistics of the Network port F

DSP PM OAM Displays the main link performance statistics for OAM cells

DSP PM OAM STATUS Displays connections on which there is currently OAM AIS and/or RDI cells and/or are experiencing loss of continuity

DSP PM USER Displays the performance statistics of the User port F

DSP PSTN Displays the Public Switch Telephone Network parameters

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-3

Table 8-1. LA-110 Commands (Cont.)

Command Purpose Options

DSP ROUTING TABLE DATA

Displays the Routing Table for the Data port

DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN

Displays the Routing Table for the LAN port

DSP SP PORT Displays the CONTROL DCE (SP) port parameters

DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Displays the current MAC addresses in the LAN table

DSP STATIC MAC ADDR DATA

Displays the current MAC addresses in the Data table

DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN

Displays the current static routing addresses in the Routing table in the LAN port

DSP STATIC ROUTING DATA

Displays the current static routing addresses in the Routing table in the Data port

DSP SYS Displays general information of LA-110

DSP SYSERR Displays errors of LA-100 system

DSP SYSPARAMS Displays system parameters of LA-110

DSP USER Displays the User port parameters

8.3 Display Commands

DSP ADDR ATM

Purpose

Displays the VPI.VCI and IP address used to connect to the SNMP agent of LA-110 through the main link, and the state of the connection.

Format

DSP ADDR ATM

Use

1. Type: dsp addr atm

2. Press <Enter>.

3. The corresponding data form will then be displayed. A typical form is shown in Figure 8-1.

MNGT: VPI.VCI - 0. 0

State - Not active

IP Address - 0. 0. 0. 0

Figure 8-1. DSP ADDR ATM

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-4 Display Commands

The display fields are similar to the fields in the DEF ADDR ATM command.

DSP ADDR ILMI

Purpose

Displays the VPI.VCI used to connect to the ILMI agent of LA-110 through the main link, and the state of the connection.

Format

DSP ADDR ILMI

Use

1. Type: dsp addr ilmi

2. Press <Enter>.

3. The ILMI address data form will then be displayed. A typical form is shown in Figure 8-2.

ILMI: VPI.VCI - 0. 16

State - Active

Figure 8-2. DSP ADDR ILMI

UNDEFINED indicates that the ILMI address has not been defined.

DSP ALM

Purpose

Displays the contents of the alarm buffer. This buffer can contain up to 200 alarms.

Format

DSP ALM

Use

1. Type: dsp alm

2. Press <Enter>.

Display Format

The contents of the alarm buffer will be displayed as a table with four columns: the alarm number, the alarm text (description), the alarm status, and the date and time of occurrence. Chapter 9 lists all the alarm messages that can be displayed by the terminal.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-5

LA110>dsp alm

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN OFF 2001-04-5 T09:32:37

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN ON 2001-04-5 T09:29:52

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN OFF 2001-04-5 T09:11:57

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN ON 2001-04-5 T09:04:47

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN OFF 2001-04-5 T09:02:22

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN ON 2001-04-5 T09:01:47

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN OFF 2001-04-5 T08:57:42

ALARM 44 FRAME-RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN ON 2001-04-5 T08:51:26

ALARM 18 IO2 PORT E1 CRC-4 ERROR 2001-04-5 T08:51:25

ALARM 46 RESET OCCURRED

Figure 8-3. DSP ALM

DSP ARP TABLE LAN

Purpose

Displays ARP Table for LAN port.

Format

DSP ARP TABLE LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp arp table lan

2. Press <Enter>.

LA110> dsp arp table lan

ARP TABLE

index IP Address MAC Address

1 001.001.001.002 00.00.00.00.00.01

2 001.001.001.003 00.00.00.00.00.02

3 001.001.001.004 00.00.00.00.00.03

4 001.001.001.005 00.00.00.00.00.04

5 001.001.001.006 00.00.00.00.00.05

Figure 8-4. DSP ARP TABLE LAN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-6 Display Commands

DSP BUNDLE

Purpose

Displays a bundle. A bundle is a selection of time slots. You can display either all bundles or an individual bundle.

Format

DSP BUNDLE

Use

1. Type: dsp bundle

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Select type of display: all to display all bundles

individual to display an individual bundle.

4. If you enter individual an additional prompt requests the index of the bundle you wish to display.

5. Enter the index of the bundle you want to display.

LA110> dsp bundle

Display mode:

Index:

Figure 8-5. DSP BUNDLE

If you select all the screen shown in Figure 8-6 appears.

Tx and Rx time slots

Index 1 31

----- -------------------------------

1 ...!!!............!..!.........

2 !.......!..!...................

3 .......................!!!.....

Figure 8-6. Displaying All Bundles

In the display, each dot represents a time slot not used by the bundle while each exclamation mark represents a time slot occupied by the bundle.

If you select individual, the screen shown in Figure 8-7 appears.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-7

Transmit and Receive Time Slots

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

yes n/a no no no no no no no no no no no no no

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

n/a no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no

Figure 8-7. Displaying an Individual Bundle

DSP COMMUNITY

Purpose

Displays the community strings used for SNMP and ILMI management. During Telnet sessions, this command can be used to display only the ILMI community.

Format

DSP COMMUNITY

Use

1. Type: dsp community

2. Press <Enter>. The community names list is displayed. A typical display appearing on a supervision terminal is shown in Figure 8-8 (when the command is entered during a Telnet session, only the ILMI community is displayed).

LA110> dsp community

SNMP read-only community: public

SNMP read-write community: private

SNMP trap community: public

ILMI community: ILMI

Figure 8-8. DSP COMMUNITY

DSP CONN DATA

Purpose

Displays the parameters of the connections defined on a module ports.

Format

DSP CONN DATA

Use

1. Type: dsp conn data

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-8 Display Commands

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display for a data port operating in the AAL1 Stream mode is shown in Figure 8-9.

LA110>dsp conn data

Display mode: all

Rx Tx

bytes/ bytes/ Time Since Index VPI.VCI cell cell Active Last Change

1 6. 22 47 47 on 0:00:04

Figure 8-9. DSP CON DATA – AAL1 Stream Application Mode

DSP CONN LAN

Purpose

Displays the parameters of the connections defined on the LAN port.

Format

DSP CONN LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp conn lan

2. Press <Enter>. A prompt requests you to select the desired connection display mode. A typical display mode selection form is shown below:

Display mode: all

3. Select the display mode: All – Display all the connections defined for the selected port. This

selection is not applicable for Ethernet ports.

Individual – Display a specific connection.

4. Press <Enter>. If your selection is all, you will see the connection parameters data for all

the connections defined on this port.

If your selection is individual, you will be prompted to enter the index number of the desired connection. A typical prompt is shown below.

Index:

5. After typing the index of the desired connection, press <Enter>.

6. The requested connection parameters data form is displayed. The parameters appearing on the data form depend on the port type and application mode. For an explanation of the display fields, refer to the Def LAN in Chapter 4.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-9

LA110> dsp conn lan

ETHERNET Interface

Display mode : all

Cont Alloc Bit Time-Since- Index VPI.VCI Check Buff Rate SCR PCR MBS Active Last-Change

1 1. 1 off-two way 50 UBR ---- ---- ---- on 0:04:26

Min Link Index IP Mask RIP Encaps Auth Act

1 0. 0. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0 None RFC 1483 N/A N/A

Figure 8-10. DSP CONN LAN

DSP CONN USER

Purpose

Displays the parameters of the connections defined on the user port.

Format

DSP CONN USER

Use

1. Type: dsp conn user

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display (for ISDN) is shown in Figure 8-11.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-10 Display Commands

LA110>dsp conn user

ISDN Interface

Display mode : all

Rx Tx

bytes/ bytes/ Cont Conn Time Since Index VPI.VCI CID cell cell Check Type Active Last Change

1 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:41 2 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:41 3 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:41 4 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:41 5 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:41 6 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:41

Type Pntr Idle Sig (AB) Bits Channel Index Sig Sig Parity Tx Rx Type Port #

1 yes CCS on --- --- D Channel 1 2 yes CCS on --- --- B1 Channel 1 3 yes CCS on --- --- B2 Channel 1 4 yes CCS on --- --- D Channel 2 5 yes CCS on --- --- B1 Channel 2 6 yes CCS on --- --- B2 Channel 2

Hit any key to continue...

Rx Tx

bytes/ bytes/ Cont Conn Time Since Index VPI.VCI CID cell cell Check Type Active Last Change

7 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:43 8 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:43 9 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:43 10 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:43 11 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:43 12 0. 38 N/A 44 44 off-two way AAL 2 on 1:52:43

Type Pntr Idle Sig (AB) Bits Channel Index Sig Sig Parity Tx Rx Type Port #

7 yes CCS on --- --- D Channel 3 8 yes CCS on --- --- B1 Channel 3 9 yes CCS on --- --- B2 Channel 3 10 yes CCS on --- --- D Channel 4 11 yes CCS on --- --- B1 Channel 4 12 yes CCS on --- --- B2 Channel 4

Figure 8-11. DSP CONN USER

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-11

DSP DATA

Purpose

Displays the data port and its operational status.

Format

DSP DATA

Use

3. Type: dsp data

4. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-12.

LA110> dsp data

CBR DATA Interface

Application : AAL1 Stream

Clock : DCE

DCD & RTS : Ignore Signals

Baud Rate : 64k

Inverted Clock : Enable

Figure 8-12. DSP DATA – AAL1

LA110> dsp data

FRAME RELAY Interface

Application : Fraem Relay

Clock : DCE

Protocol : None

CRC : 16 bit

CLLM : no

Baud Rate : 64k

Inverted Clock : Disable

Figure 8-13. DSP DATA – Frame Relay

DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN

Purpose

Displays the default gateway and its operational status.

Format

DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-12 Display Commands

Use

1. Type: dsp default gateway lan

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-14.

LA110> dsp default gateway lan

Port/Conn :Conn 1

Active :Disable

Figure 8-14. DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN

DSP DHCP

Purpose

Displays DHCP addresses.

Format

DSP DHCP

Use

1. Type: dsp dhcp

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-15.

LA110>dsp dhcp

Display DHCP Server :PoPools

Index Lowest IP Highest IP Mask

1 3. 0. 0. 0 3. 0. 0. 5 3. 0. 0. 0

Index Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Lease Time

1 3. 0. 0. 1 ------- ------- 600 min

Figure 8-15. DSP DHCP – Pools

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-13

LA110>dsp dhcp

Display DHCP Server :AlAllocation Table

Index : 001

Index Lowest IP Highest IP Mask

1 3. 0. 0. 0 3. 0. 0. 5 3. 0. 0. 0

Index Default Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS Lease Time

1 3. 0. 0. 1 ------- ------- 600 min

Hit any key to continue...

IP address Mac address Time left Status

3. 0. 0. 0 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free

3. 0. 0. 1 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free

3. 0. 0. 2 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free

3. 0. 0. 3 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free

3. 0. 0. 4 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free

3. 0. 0. 5 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0 0 free

Figure 8-16. DSP DHCP – Allocation Table

DSP LAN

Purpose

Displays the operating parameters of the LAN port.

Format

DSP LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp lan

2. Press <Enter>. The data display is in accordance with the application (operating mode) of the LAN port: Ethernet Bridge – A typical data form with the operating parameters of

the LAN port as bridge is shown in Figure 8-17.

Ethernet Router – A typical data form with the operating parameters of the LAN port as router is shown in Figure 8-18.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-14 Display Commands

LA110>dsp lan

ETHERNET Interface

Application : Ethernet bridge

Auto Negotiation : Enable

MAX Capability : 100BASE_T - full duplex mode

Default Type : 100BASE_T - half duplex mode

Detected Rate : 100Mbps

Detected Mode : Full Duplex

Bridge-Mode : Access only

Encapsulation : Bridged Ethernet without CRC

Aging-Time : 5 Minutes

Mac address : 00 20 D2 18 7F 23

PPPoE : Disable

Figure 8-17. DSP LAN – Ethernet Bridge

LA110> dsp lan

ETHERNET Interface

Application : Ethernet router

Auto Negotiation : Enable

MAX Capability : 100BASE_T - half duplex mode

Default Type : 100BASE_T - full duplex mode

Detected Rate : 10Mbps

Detected Mode : Half Duplex

IP Address : 1. 1. 1. 1

Mask : 255.255.255.0

Aging : 5 min

Timeout : 1 sec

RIP mode : None

DHCP Relay : Disable

Figure 8-18. DSP LAN – Ethernet Router

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-15

DSP MAC ADDR LAN

Purpose

Displays the MAC Address of the LAN port.

Format

DSP MAC ADDR LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp mac addr lan

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-19.

LA110>dsp mac addr lan

Lan port mac address : 00 20 D2 17 B9 64

MAc address table empty

Figure 8-19. DSP MAC ADDR LAN

DSP NAT

Purpose

Displays NAT information.

Format

DSP NAT

Use

1. Type: dsp nat

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-20.

LA110> dsp nat

Index Interface Nat Type IP Mask

1 Conn 1 Single Real: 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255

Virtual: 1.0.0.0 255.0.0.0

Figure 8-20. DSP NAT

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-16 Display Commands

DSP NETWORK

Purpose

Displays information about the network interface.

Format

DSP NETWORK

Use

1. Type: dsp network

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-21.

LA110> dsp network

SHDSL Interface

Scramble : Enable

Idle cell CLP : 1 (ITU)

Traffic Shaping : UBR

Mode : CPE

Framer Type : Utopia L2

Power Backoff : Enable

NTR : NTR disabled

Standard : ANNEX A

Startup Margin : 0 db MarginSHDSL

Asym. PSD : Rate Asym R1 Disable

Line Probe Enable: Adaptive Rate

Min Rate : 200

Max Rate : 2312

Figure 8-21. DSP NETWORK

DSP NMS

Purpose

Displays the list of currently defined network management stations, and find the index of the desired network management station.

Format

DSP NMS

Use

1. Type: dsp nms

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-17

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Type the number of the network management station to be displayed, and then press <Enter>.

A message shows the index of the network management station being displayed, followed by the NMS modification data form. A typical data form is shown in Figure 8-22.

LA110>dsp nms

Index : all

Index IP Address Link-Up & Alarm trap Leds-Status-Change Link-Down

------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 192.168.213.21 unmask unmask unmask

Figure 8-22. DSP NMS

DSP PAT

Purpose

Displays PAT information.

Format

DSP PAT

Use

1. Type: dsp pat

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-23.

LA110> dsp pat

Index Real IP Virtual IP Port (Min, Max) Protocol

1 3.0.0.0 3.0.0.0 User 1 5 TCP

Figure 8-23. DSP PAT

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-18 Display Commands

DSP PM ATM

Purpose

Displays the performance monitoring statistics for the ATM network interface physical layer in the Network.

Format

DSP PM ATM

Use

1. Type: dsp pm atm

2. Press <Enter>. The ATM physical layer performance data is displayed. A typical display for the full ATM layer statistics data is shown in Figure 8-24.

The parameters are described in Table 8-2.

LA110>dsp pm atm

E1 UPLINK PHYSICAL LAYER STATISTICS

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Current time : 11:28:40

Seconds : 4116

Intervals : 0

Tx Total Rx Total Rx CLPI=1 Rx Discarded Rx HEC

Cells Cells Cells Cells Cells

-------------------------------------------------------

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

15 minutes : 89397175 0 0 0 0

24 hours :

Figure 8-24. DSP PM ATM

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-19

Table 8-2. DSP PM ATM

Parameter Function

1 second The statistics collected during the last second

15 minutes The statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval

24 hours The statistics collected during the current 24-hour period. An asterisk * following the 24 hours label indicates that data has not yet been collected for a full 24-hour period (in this case, the number of intervals displayed in the Intervals field of the header is less than 96).

Interval 1, 2, etc. Each interval line displays data for one of the previous 15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the most recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute interval).

ATM

Tx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been transmitted

Rx Total Cells Total number of cells that have been received

Rx CLPI=1 Cells Number of received cells with cell-loss priority

Rx Discarded Cells Total number of cells that have discarded from the received cells

Rx HEC Cells Number of received cells with Header Error Control

DSP PM CONN DATA

Purpose

Displays the performance monitoring statistics for a selected connection on one of the ports. To see the list of connections defined on the specified data port and find the index of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN NETWORK/DATA/USER command.

The information displayed on the screen depends on the module type and application mode of the interface.

Format

DSP PM CONN DATA

Use

1. Type: dsp pm conn data

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Type 1 for Connection Index, and then press <Enter> to display the performance data.

The display will extend beyond the number of lines that can be displayed on the terminal screen, therefore after viewing the current screen, press any key except <ESC> to display the next screen.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-20 Display Commands

AAL1 A typical display for the performance data collected when the DATA port is AAL1 Stream application mode, is shown in Figure 8-25.

LA110>DSP PM CONN DATA

Index 1

CONNECTION STATISTICS

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Current time : 11:28:40

Seconds : 4116

Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI – 1.1

CBR Statistics

Tx Total Rx Total Rx Total Rx Total Cells Cells Seq Errors SNP Errors

1 second : 0 0 0 0

From start : 34 0 0 0

Figure 8-25. DSP PM CONN DATA – AAL1

The display includes a header and a data section. The header includes the following information on the connection statistics:

• The current date and time, as retrieved from the internal real-time clock of LA-110.

• The number of the seconds since the connection has been defined, or since the last time the performance data has been cleared by entering the CLR PM command.

The following line shows the main connection parameters: port number on which the connection is defined, ATM virtual path parameters.

The data section provides the CBR statistics, described in Table 8-3.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-21

Table 8-3. DSP PM CONN DATA

Parameter Function

1 second The statistics collected during the last second

From start The statistics collected since the connection has been defined, or from the last time the counters have been reset using the CLR PM command.

AAL1

Tx Total Cells Total number of ATM cells that have been transmitted

Rx Total Cells Total number of cells that have been received

Rx Total Seq Errors Total number of sequential errors that have detected for the received cells

Rx Total SNP Errors Total number of SNP errors that have detected for the received cells

DSP PM CONN AAL2

Purpose

Displays Performance Monitoring statistics for AAL2 connection.

Format

DSP PM CONN AAL2

Use

1. Type: dsp pm conn aal2

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-26.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-22 Display Commands

LA110> dsp pm conn aal2

Enter VP: 2 Vc: 2

CONNECTION STATISTICS

Curent Date: MAR. 26, 2001

Current Time: 14:36:21

Seconds: 30

E1 Interface – USER side

Connection 1 on the USER port: VPI.VCI.CID – 2.2.16

CBR Statistics – 200 msec.

Tx Total Rx Total RX Total Rx Total Rx Total Ptr Parity Cells Cells Seq Errors Resync SNP Errors Error

1 second: 0 0 0 0 0 0

From start: 5 0 0 0 0 0

AAL2 STATISTICS

1 second From start

In packets: 0 0

Out packets: 5 5

Parity errors: 0 0

Sequence number errors: 0 0

OSF errors: 0 0

HEC arrors: 0 0

UUI errors: 0 0

CID errors: 0 0

Figure 8-26. DSP PM CONN AAL2

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-23

DSP PM CONN LAN

Purpose

Displays the performance monitoring statistics for a selected connection on the LAN port. To see the list of connections defined on the LAN port, and find the index of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN LAN command.

Format

DSP PM CONN LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp pm conn lan

2. Press <Enter>. You will then be prompted to select the desired connection index.

A typical display for the performance data collected is shown in Figure 8-27. The data section includes the following sub (CBR) performance monitoring parameters.

LA110>dsp pm conn lan Index : 1 ETHERNET CONNECTION STATISTICS Current date : APR. 10, 2002 Current time : 12:07:45 Seconds : 29 Connection 1 on Lan port: VPI.VCI - 0.6 AAL5 Statistics Tx Total Rx Total Tx Discarded Rx Discarded CRC Error Frames Frames Frames Frames Frames 1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 From start : 0 0 0 0 0 Tx Total Rx Total Rx Discarded Cells Cells Cells - 1 second : 0 0 0 From start : 0 0 0 Current status : OFF

Figure 8-27. DSP PM CONN LAN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-24 Display Commands

DSP PM CONN OAM DATA

Purpose

Displays the OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) performance monitoring statistics for a selected port on one of the modules. To see the list of connections defined on the specified module’s port, and find the index of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN OAM command.

Since the ATM layer processes the OAM cells, the OAM performance monitoring statistics do not depend on the interface type, or on the application mode, of the data port.

Format

DSP PM CONN OAM DATA

Use • Type: dsp pm conn oam data

Figure 8-28 shows the DATA port in Frame Relay application mode.

Figure 8-29 shows the DATA port in AAL1 Stream application mode.

The display includes a header and a data section. The header includes the following information on the connection statistics:

• The current date and time, as retrieved from the internal real-time clock of LA-110.

• The number of the seconds since the connection has been defined, or since the last time the performance data has been cleared by entering the CLR PM command.

• The next line shows the main connection parameters: port number on which the connection is defined, ATM virtual path parameters.

The data section provides the OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) statistics for the DATA port.

The data section is divided in two parts.

• The first part includes the AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) statistics data, and the loopback attempts to troubleshoot the alarm cause.

• The second part presents the RDI (Remote Defect Indication) statistics for failures that occurred at the far end of the ATM network, and the loopback attempts to troubleshoot the defective cause.

The parameters are listed in Table 8-4.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-25

LA110>DSP PM CONN OAM DATA CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS Current date : MAR. 05, 2002 Current time : 15:33:55 Seconds : 8808 Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI - 1.1, FR DLCI - 16 Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks 1 second : 1 1 0 0 0 From start : 796 795 0 0 0 Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses 1 second : 1 1 0 0 0 0 From start : 796 796 0 0 0 0

Figure 8-28. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA – Frame Relay

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-26 Display Commands

LA110>dsp pm conn oam data

Index : 1

CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS

=========================

Current date : OCT. 23, 2002

Current time : 18:45:22

Seconds : 8

Connection 1 on port 1: VPI.VCI - 2.0

Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total

AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed

(seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks

--------------------------------------------------------

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

From start : 0 0 0 0 0

Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total

RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback

Requests Requests Responses Responses

---------------------------------------------------------------

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0

From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0

Figure 8-29. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA – AAL1 Stream

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-27

Table 8-4. DSP PM CONN OAM DATA

Parameter Function

1 second The statistics collected during the last second

From start The statistics collected since the connection has been defined, or from the last time the counters have been reset using the CLR PM command.

OAM

Tx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells transmitted on the selected connection.

VC-AIS cells are transmitted downstream when a fault is detected on the VC used by the connection, or at the physical level serving the connection.

Rx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells received on the selected port

Loss of Continuity Loss of continuity in the transmission, in seconds, due to alarm signals.

Total Successful Loopbacks

Total number of OAM cells looped back in response to a loopback command.

Total Failed Loopbacks

Total number of OAM cells which could not be looped back in response to a loopback command.

RDI statistics

Tx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells transmitted on the selected port.

RDI cells are transmitted upstream when a fault is detected locally on the VC used by the connection, or at the physical level serving the connection.

Rx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells received on the selected port from the main link.

Tx Total Loopback Requests

Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted on the selected port.

Rx Total Loopback Requests

Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted on the selected port from the main link.

Tx Total Loopback Responses

Total number of OAM loopback responses transmitted on the selected port.

Rx Total Loopback Responses

Total number of OAM loopback responses received on the selected port from the main link.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-28 Display Commands

DSP PM CONN OAM LAN

Purpose

Displays the OAM performance monitoring statistics for the connection on the LAN module. To see the list of connections defined on the specified module’s port, and find the index of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN LAN command.

Since the ATM layer processes the OAM cells, the OAM performance monitoring statistics do not depend on the interface type, or on the application mode, of the LAN port.

Format

DSP PM CONN OAM LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp pm conn oam lan

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Type 1 for Connection Index.

4. Press <Enter> to display the performance data. A typical display for the OAM performance data of a data port configured for the Frame Relay application mode is shown in Figure 8-30.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-29

LA110>DSP PM CONN OAM LAN

Index: 1

CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS

Current date : APR. 05, 2001

Current time : 15:23:03

Seconds : 326

Connection 1 on port LAN: VPI.VCI - 2.2

Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0

From start : 0 0 0 0 0

Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses

1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0

From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0

Figure 8-30. DSP PM CONN OAM LAN

The display includes a header, and a data section. The header includes the following information:

• The current date and time, as retrieved from the internal real-time clock of LA-110.

• The number of the seconds since the connection has been defined, or since the last time the performance data has been cleared by entering the CLR PM command.

The data section parameters are listed in Table 8-5.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-30 Display Commands

Table 8-5. DSP PM CONN OAM LAN

Parameter Function

1 second The statistics collected during the last second

From start The statistics collected since the connection has been defined, or from the last time the counters have been reset using the CLR PM command.

OAM

Tx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells transmitted on the LAN connection.

VC-AIS cells are transmitted downstream when a fault is detected on the VC used by the connection, or at the physical level serving the LAN connection.

RX Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells received on the LAN connection from the network.

Loss of Continuity The number of seconds during which there was loss of continuity.

Tx Total AIS Cells Total number of VC-AIS cells transmitted on the LAN connection.

VC-AIS cells are transmitted downstream when a fault is detected on the VC used by the connection, or at the physical level serving the LAN connection.

Total Successful Loopbacks

Total number of OAM cells looped back in response to a loopback command.

Total Failed Loopbacks

Total number of OAM cells which could not be looped back in response to a loopback command.

RDI statistics

Tx Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells transmitted on the LAN connection.

RDI cells are transmitted upstream when a fault is detected locally on the VC used by the connection, or at the physical level serving the connection.

RX Total RDI Cells Total number of RDI cells received on the LAN connection from the network.

Tx Total Loopback Requests

Total number of OAM loopback requests transmitted on the LAN connection.

Rx Total Loopback Requests

Total number of OAM loopback requests received on the LAN connection from the main link.

Tx Total Loopback Responses

Total number of OAM loopback responses transmitted on the LAN connection.

Rx Total Loopback Responses

Total number of OAM loopback responses received LAN connection from the network.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-31

DSP PM CONN OAM USER

Purpose

Displays the OAM performance monitoring statistics for a selected connection on one of the user ports. To see the list of connections defined on the specified data port, and find the index of the desired connection, use the DSP CONN command.

Since the OAM cells are processed by the ATM layer, the OAM performance monitoring statistics do not depend on the interface type, nor on the application mode, of the data port.

Format

DSP PM CONN OAM USER

Use

1. Type: dsp pm conn oam user

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Perform one of the following: ISDN/FXS: Choose Port Index with the <F> or <B> key

E1: Type a Connection Number.

4. Press <Enter> to display the performance data.

5. Press on any key in the control terminal keyboard for the B1 and B2 channels.

Typical displays for the performance data collected for the User port module with ISDN line connection is shown in Figure 8-31, Figure 8-32, and Figure 8-33.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-32 Display Commands

LA110>DSP PM CONN OAM USER

Port Index in the Interface : 1 CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS Current date : MAR. 05, 2002 Current time : 15:48:38 Seconds : 387 Connection 1 on User : VPI.VCI.CID - 1.1.16 ISDN Interface Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks 1 second : 0 1 0 0 0 From start : 0 388 0 0 0 Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses 1 second : 1 0 0 0 0 0 From start : 388 0 0 0 0 0 Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-31. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – ISDN – D Channel

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-33

CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Current time : 15:48:40

Seconds : 389

Connection 1 on User : VPI.VCI.CID - 1.1.17

ISDN Interface

Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks

1 second : 0 1 0 0 0

From start : 0 390 0 0 0

Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses

1 second : 1 0 0 0 0 0

From start : 390 0 0 0 0 0

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-32. Connection OAM Statistics – B1 Channel

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-34 Display Commands

CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Current time : 15:48:42

Seconds : 391

Connection 1 on User : VPI.VCI.CID - 1.1.18

ISDN Interface

Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks

1 second : 0 1 0 0 0

From start : 0 392 0 0 0

Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses

1 second : 1 0 0 0 0 0

From start : 392 0 0 0 0 0

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-33. Connection OAM Statistics – B2 Channel

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-35

FXS Module

A typical display for the OAM performance data collected for with an FXS module in User port is shown in Figure 8-34.

LA110>dsp pm conn oam user Port Index in the Interface : 1 CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS Current date : APR. 05, 2001 Current time : 15:51:45 Seconds : 433 Connection 1 on User : VPI.VCI.CID - 3.3.20 FXS Interface Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks 1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 From start : 0 0 0 0 0 Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses 1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0 From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0

Figure 8-34. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – FXS

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-36 Display Commands

E1

A typical display for the performance data collected for the User port module with E1 line connection is shown in Figure 8-35.

LA110> dsp pm conn oam user Index: 1 CONNECTION OAM STATISTICS Current date : APR. 05, 2001 Current time : 15:35:34 Seconds : 12 Connection 1 on the IO2 port: VPI.VCI.CID - 2.2.20 E1 Interface Tx Total Rx Total Loss of Total Total AIS Cells AIS Cells Continuity Successful Failed (seconds) Loopbacks Loopbacks 1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 From start : 0 0 0 0 0 Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total Tx Total Rx Total RDI Cells RDI Cells Loopback Loopback Loopback Loopback Requests Requests Responses Responses 1 second : 0 0 0 0 0 0 From start : 0 0 0 0 0 0

Figure 8-35. DSP PM CONN OAM USER – E1

The fields in this display are very similar to the fields for the Network port. They are described in the previous paragraph.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-37

DSP PM IP

Purpose

Displays IP Performance Monitoring on the LAN port (only in Router application)

Format

DSP PM IP

Use

1. Type: dsp pm ip

2. Press <Enter>.

LA110> dsp pm ip

IP PM

Total Rx frames : 0

Rx Errored header frames : 0

Rx Errored addr frames : 0

Out frames with no routing : 0

Forwarded frames : 0

Rx discarded frames : 0

Output discarded frames : 0

Figure 8-36. DSP PM IP

DSP PM NETWORK

Purpose

Displays the performance monitoring statistics for the ATM network interface physical layer in the Uplink collected during the last 24 hours.

The display of performance monitoring statistics is dependent on the type of uplink connection to the network port:

• SHDSL Uplink connection

• ADSL Uplink connection

Format

DSP PM NETWORK – for current statistics

DSP PM NETWORK (f) – for current statistics and history during the last 24 hours.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-38 Display Commands

Use

1. Type: dsp pm network

2. Press <Enter>. The Uplink current physical layer performance data for ADSL is displayed in Figure 8-37. SHDSL is displayed in Figure 8-38.

LA110>dsp pm network

ADSL ANNEX A PM

Current date : SEPT. 19, 2002

Current time : 11:57:14

Seconds : 17

Intervals : 1

Op State : HANDSHAKE

Bitrate Latency Downstream Upstream Downstream Upstream SNR

0 0 Interleave Interleave

Interleave Fast Errored frames Loss of signal defects

1 sec 0 0 0 0

15 min 0 0 0 0

From Start 0 0 0 0

Figure 8-37. DSP PM NETWORK – ADSL

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-39

LA110>dsp pm network

SHDSL PM

Current date : SEP. 19, 2002

Current time : 12:00:55

Seconds : 189

Intervals : 2

Framer Sync Status : No Sync DSP Version : 1

Op State : IDLE Globespan Software Version : R1.5

Bit Rate : 0 SNR : 0

Loop Attenuation : 0 Transmit Power : 0.0

CRC Err Sec Severely Err Sec LOSW Sec Unavailable Sec

current : 0 0 0 0 0

15min : 0 0 0 0 0

24 hours : 0 0 0 0 0

***************************************************************************

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-38. DSP PM NETWORK – SHDSL

Use

1. Type: dsp pm network (f)

2. Press <Enter>. The Uplink physical layer performance data is displayed. If the display extends beyond the number of lines that can be displayed on the terminal screen, the message HIT ANY KEY TO CONTINUE... appears on the last screen line. Pressing any key except <ESC> will display the next statistics line.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-40 Display Commands

The display includes a header, and a data section. The header includes:

• The current date and time, as retrieved from the internal real-time clock of LA-110.

• The number of seconds (within the current 15-minute interval). The range of values in this field is 0 through 899.

• The number of 15-minute intervals in the current 24-hour period for which statistics are available. The range of values in this field is 0 through 96.

The number of lines included in the data section depends on the type of display.

A typical display for the ADSL Uplink physical layer performance data is shown in Figure 8-39 and SHDSL in Figure 8-40. Note that the Interval lines are only displayed when the f option is used.

LA110>dsp pm network

ADSL ANNEX A PM

Current date : SEPT. 19, 2002

Current time : 11:57:14

Seconds : 658

Intervals : 3

Op State : HANDSHAKE

Bitrate Latency Downstream Upstream Downstream Upstream SNR

0 0 Interleave Interleave

Interleave Fast Errored frames Loss of signal defects

1 sec 0 0 0 0

15 min 0 0 0 0

From Start 0 0 0 0

*****************************************************************

Hit any key to continue…

Interleave Fast LOF LOS ESS Interval ERR SEC ERR SEC ERR SEC ERR SEC ERR SEC

1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Hit any key to continue…

Figure 8-39. DSP PM NETWORK f – ADSL

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-41

LA110>DSP PM NETWORK f

SHDSL PM

Current date : SEP. 19, 2002

Current time : 12:01:22

Seconds : 216

Intervals : 2

Framer Sync Status : No Sync DSP Version : 1

Op State : IDLE Globespan Software Version : R1.5

Bit Rate : 0 SNR : 0

Loop Attenuation : 0 Transmit Power : 0.0

CRC Err Sec Severely Err Sec LOSW Sec Unavailable Sec

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

current : 0 0 0 0 0

15 min : 0 0 0 0 0

24 hours : 0 0 0 0 0

***************************************************************************

Hit any key to continue...

CRC Err Sec Severely Err Sec LOSW Sec Unavailable Sec

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Interval 1:0 0 0 0 0

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-40. DSP PM NETWORK f – SHDSL

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-42 Display Commands

Table 8-6. DSP PM NETWORK

Parameter Function

1 second The statistics collected during the last second.

15 minutes The statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval.

24 hours The statistics collected during the current 24-hour period. An asterisk * following the 24 hours label indicates that data has not yet been collected for a full 24-hour period (in this case, the number of intervals displayed in the Intervals field of the header is less than 96).

Interval 1, 2, etc. Each interval line displays data for one of the previous 15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the most recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute interval).

ES Local errored seconds. A local errored second is any second with at least one code violation.

UAS Local unavailable seconds with respect to E1 service. A local UAS second is any second during which the E1 layer service is unavailable. Service becomes unavailable at the declaration of a transmission failure condition, and becomes available again after clearing the failure condition.

SES Local severely errored seconds with respect to E1 errors. A local severely errored second is any second with 20 or more code violations.

BES Current bursty errored seconds. A BES is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error events.

LOFC Current loss of frame counter. The loss of frame (LOF) counter counts the loss of frame alignment events.

LOS

LOSW

LOS ERR

Loss of seconds

CSS Controlled slip second count. A CSS is a second with one or more controlled frame slip events.

Framer Sync Status Status of the framer synchronization.

Op State Operational status.

Loop Attenuation Total number of ATM frames that have been transmitted and discarded.

SNR Signal to Noise Ratio

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-43

DSP PM LAN

Purpose

Displays the performance monitoring statistics for the LAN port in LA-110. The information displayed does not depend on the application mode of the LAN port.

Format

DSP PM LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp pm lan

2. Press <Enter>. The performance data will be displayed. If the display extends beyond the number of lines that can be displayed on the terminal screen, press any key except <ESC> to display the next screen.

3. To display the full performance data, including interval data collected during the last 24 hours, type: dsp pm lan f

4. Press <Enter>. The number of lines included in the data section depends on the type of display (see Figure 8-41).

The performance statistics parameters are described in Table 8-7.

LA110> dsp pm lan

LAN PORT STATISTICS

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Current time : 15:55:58

Seconds : 858

Intervals : 0

Tx Total Rx Total Rx Discarded Tx Discarded Frames Frames Frames Frames

1 second : 0 0 0 0

15 minutes : 0 0 0 0

24 hours * : *********** *********** *********** ***********

Figure 8-41. DSP PM LAN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-44 Display Commands

Table 8-7. DSP PM LAN

Parameter Function

1 second The statistics collected during the last second.

15 minutes The statistics collected during the current 15-minute interval.

24 hours The statistics collected during the current 24-hour period. An asterisk * following the 24 hours label indicates that data has not yet been collected for a full 24-hour period (in this case, the number of intervals displayed in the Intervals field of the header is less than 96).

Full display presents the interval data

dsp pm lan f

Interval 1, 2, etc. Each interval line displays data for one of the previous 15-minute intervals of the current 24-hour period, starting with the most recent interval (interval 1 always shows the most recent complete 15-minute interval).

Tx Total Frames Total number of ATM frames that have been transmitted

Rx Total Frames Total number of ATM DXI frames that have been received

Rx Discarded Frames

Total number of ATM frames that have been received and discarded

Tx Discarded Frames Total number of ATM frames that have been transmitted and discarded

Note: In the ‘f’ option this is not displayed.

DSP PM OAM

Purpose

Displays the OAM performance monitoring statistics on the LA-110 uplink.

To display details on the OAM cells processed by a specific connection defined on the selected port, use the DSP PM CONN OAM command.

Format

DSP PM OAM [F]

Use

1. Type: dsp pm oam

2. Press <Enter>.

3. To display the full performance data, including interval data collected during the last 24 hours, type:

dsp pm oam f

4. Press <Enter>.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-45

The OAM performance data is displayed. If the display extends beyond the number of lines that can be displayed on the terminal screen, press any key except <ESC> to display the next screen. A typical OAM performance monitoring statistics display is shown in Figure 8-42.

The Interval lines are only displayed when the f option is used.

LA110>DSP PM LAN

OAM STATISTICS

Current date : MAR. 05, 2002

Current time : 15:57:39

Seconds : 194

Intervals : 3

Tx Total OAM cells Rx Total OAM cells

1 second : 1 1

15 minutes : 123 122

24 hours * : 867 868

Figure 8-42. DSP PM OAM

Table 8-8. DSP PM OAM

Parameter Function

Tx Total OAM Cells Total number of OAM cells that have been transmitted by the main link

Rx Total OAM Cells Total number of OAM cells that have been received by the main link

DSP PM OAM STATUS

Purpose

Displays the status of connections that currently have OAM traffic.

Format

DSP PM OAM STATUS

Use

1. Type: dsp sp port

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-43.

Note

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-46 Display Commands

LA110> dsp pm oam status

Port AIS RDI LOC Index No. VPI.VCI Tx Rx Tx Rx

1 lan port 0 .51 -- on on -- 0:00:00

Figure 8-43. DSP PM OAM STATUS

DSP PM USER

Purpose

Displays Performance Monitoring parameters for the user port.

Format

DSP PM USER

Use

1. Type: dsp pm user

2. Press <Enter>. Figure 8-44 and Figure 8-45 show ISDN. Figure 8-46 shows E1. Figure 8-48 shows FXS.

Table 8-6 explains the parameters.

You can enter dsp pm user f to view statistics for 24 hours. This does not apply to FXS or IDDN.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-47

LA110>dsp pm user

ISDN Status and Statistics.

Port Index in the Interface : 1

CID L1 Status

D-Ch :0 B1-Ch :0 B2-Ch :0 SEND INFO 2 0x0B

Hit any key to continue...

PCM Channel Status HDLC(D-Ch)

D-Ch B1-Ch B2-Ch Frames Errors

Tx :open close close 0 0

Rx :open close close 0 0

Hit any key to continue...

SSted Statistics

Packet CRC-Error LenErrors Errors

Tx :0 0 0 0

Rx :0 0 0 0

Hit any key to continue...

AAL2 Statistics

D-Ch B1-Ch B2-Ch

Cells Errors Cells Errors Cells Errors

Tx :0 0 0 0 0 0

Rx :0 0 0 0 0 0

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-44. DSP PM USER – ISDN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-48 Display Commands

Do you want to display Errors History ? (Y)

Errors History

HDLC

Index Error Time CID

No errors found .

Hit any key to continue...

AAL2

Index Error Time CID

No errors found .

Hit any key to continue...

SSted

Index Error Time CID

No errors found .

Figure 8-45. DSP PM USER – ISDN – Continued

Dsp pm user f does not apply to ISDN.

LA110>dsp pm user

E1 PORT (USER SIDE) PHYSICAL LAYER STATISTICS

Current date : MAY. 07, 2002

Current time : 11:48:22

Seconds : 114

Intervals : 0

ES UAS SES BES LOFC CSS

1 second : 0 1 1 0 0 0

15 minutes : 1 105 115 0 1 11

24 hours * : ***** **** **** **** **** ****

Figure 8-46. DSP PM USER – E1

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-49

LA110>dsp pm user f

E1 PORT (USER SIDE) PHYSICAL LAYER STATISTICS

=============================================

Current date : NOV. 06, 2002

Current time : 13:32:51

Seconds : 488

Intervals : 13

ES UAS SES BES LOFC CSS

-------------------------------------------

1 second : 0 1 1 0 0 0

15 minutes : 0 479 489 0 0 4

24 hours * : 8 9999 9999 0 1 255

-------------------------------------------

Interval 1: 0 890 900 0 0 6

Interval 2: 0 890 900 0 0 7

Interval 3: 0 890 900 0 0 5

Interval 4: 0 890 900 0 0 5

Interval 5: 0 890 900 0 0 4

Interval 6: 0 890 900 0 0 0

Interval 7: 0 890 900 0 0 4

Interval 8: 0 890 900 0 0 11

Figure 8-47. DSP PM USER f – for E1

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-50 Display Commands

LA110>dsp pm user

FXS Status and Statistics

=========================

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Monitoring | Port 1 | Port 2 | Port 3 | Port 4 |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Status |ON HOOK |ON HOOK |ON HOOK |ON HOOK |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|ELCP Status |BLOCK |----- |----- |----- |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Tx Cells |0 |0 |0 |0 |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Rx Cells |0 |0 |0 |0 |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-48. DSP PM USER – FXS

Status values are Block, Unblock (communication for this port).

ELCP Status values are On-hook, Off-hook.

Dsp pm user f does not apply to FXS.

DSP PSTN

Purpose

Displays Public Switch Telephone Network parameters.

Format

DSP PSTN

Use

1. Type: dsp pstn

2. Press <Enter>. Typical displays are shown in Figure 8-49 and Figure 8-50.

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-51

LA110>dsp pstn

Collision Priority : Originating

Meter Pulse Frequency : 12kHZ

Off Hook min time (ms) : 65

On Hook min time (ms) : 480

Register Recall min time (ms): 270

Display duration type parameters ? (Y)

Display rate type parameters ? (Y)

Display attenuation type parameters ? (Y)

Display pulse duration parameters ? (Y)

Display mode : all

2 0 Meter Pulse 200 450 Enable

3 0 Reduce Battery 120 200 Enable

NO more pulse duration types .

Display cadance ring parameters ? (Y)

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |

|Type on off on off on off on off on off|

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 1650 3300 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Number of periods in the type : 2

Hit any key to continue...

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |

|Type on off on off on off on off on off|

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 750 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Number of periods in the type : 1

Hit any key to continue...

Figure 8-49. DSP PSTN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-52 Display Commands

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

|Cadence Period1 Period2 Period3 Period4 Period5 |

|Type on off on off on off on off on off|

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

Number of periods in the type : 1

NO more cadence ring type .

Display digit parameters ? (Y)

---------------------------------

| Min | Max |

---------------------------------

On Period (ms) | 20 120

Off Period (ms) | 10 100

Inter digit time : 220 ms

Figure 8-50. DSP PSTN – Continued

DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN

Purpose

Displays the Routing Table for the LAN interface.

Format

DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp routing table lan

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-51.

Type can be:

• L (Local) – by device interface

• S (Static) – static routing configuration

• D (Dynamic) – by routing protocol.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-53

LA110> dsp routing table lan

ROUTING TABLE

index Net Address Net Mask Next Hop Age Type Metric

1 177.177.177.000 177.177.177.002 ------------ 0 L 0

2 177.177.177.001 255.255.255.255 ------------ 0 L 0

Figure 8-51. DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN

DSP SP PORT

Purpose

Displays the current CONTROL DCE port parameters.

Format

DSP SP PORT

Use

1. Type: dsp sp port

2. Press <Enter>. A typical supervisory port parameters display is shown in Figure 8-52. For an explanation of the displayed parameters, refer to DEF SP PORT in Chapter 4.

LA110> dsp sp port

Baud rate : auto Data : 8 Parity : none Log-off-time : 10 Pop-alarm : yes

Figure 8-52. DSP SP PORT

DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Purpose

Displays a selected static MAC address in the LAN port.

Format

DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-54 Display Commands

Use

1. Type: dsp static mac addr lan

2. Press <Enter>. The static MAC address index in the LAN port is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-53.

LA110>dsp static mac addr lan LAN Port Mac Address: 00 20 02 17 00 4C STATIC MAC ADDRESS TABLE Index Address Port/Conn VPI.VCI 1 AAAAAAAAAAAA Conn 1 2 1102030455A5 LAN

Figure 8-53. DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN

DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN

Purpose

Displays the current static routes in the Router table in the LAN port in LA-110.

Format

DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN

Use

1. Type: dsp static routing lan

2. Press <Enter>. The Static Routing Table is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-54.

LA110>dsp static routing lan

STATIC ROUTING ADDRESS TABLE

Index IP Mask Metric Port\Conn Nhop IP

1 192.167.236. 21 255.255.255. 0 LAN xx.xx.xx.xx

2 192.175.346. 21 255.255.255. 0 Conn xx.xx.xx.xx

Figure 8-54. DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-55

DSP SYS

Purpose

Displays general system information on LA-110.

Format

DSP SYS

Use

1. Type: dsp sys

2. Press <Enter>. A typical system status information display is shown in Figure 8-55. The fields are described in Table 8-9.

LA110>dsp sys

Device: LA-110, RAD Data Communication, Ltd.

Name : LA110

Date : APR. 26, 2002

Time : 13:46:07

ATM port interface : SHDSL

System clock : Derived from the main link

Ntr : NTR disabled

Hardware revision : 0

Loopback : none

Software version : 2.0A3 SHDSL

ELCP version : 1.00.00 ELCPAPP-1-15DEC00

Hit any key to continue...

Interfaces Table

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

| | NETWORK | USER | LAN | DATA |

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

| Interface | Type :SHDSL | Type :ISDN | Type :Ethr | Type : |

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 8-55. DSP SYS

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-56 Display Commands

Table 8-9. DSP SYS

Parameter Possible Values Function

Name The system name assigned to LA-110

Date The date retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110

Time The time retrieved from the real-time clock of LA-110

ATM port interface

Displays the physical ATM network interface type, E1

System clock

Derived from the main link

NTR: Enable/Disable

Displays the source of the system clock:

The system clock is locked to the clock signal recovered from the main link receive signal

Hardware revision

Indicates the current version the hardware

Loopback None,

Remote Network,

Local Data,

Local User

Indicates the state of LA-110 loopbacks

Software version

Displays LA-110 operating system version

DSP SYSERR

Purpose

Displays System internal errors - with a text field and a parameter. The errors are saved to the NVRAM. This command is mainly for internal use.

Format

DSP SYSERR

Use

1. Type: dsp syserr

2. Press <Enter>.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-57

DSP SYSPARAMS

Purpose

Displays LA-110 system parameters.

Format

DSP SYSPARAMS

Use

1. Type: dsp sysparams

2. Press <Enter>. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-56.

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-58 Display Commands

LA110> dsp sysparams

Global Profile

Coding Law : A law

DHCP Server : Enable

Jitter Buffer (in ms): 5

Adaptation Layer : AAL 2

Default VCC : 0 : 38

Application ID : CAS for POTS & DSS1 for ISDN (without ELCP)

SSCS Parameters

Encoding Profile : 9 - PCM - 64 ,44 octet packets , without silence

Encoding Selection : Master/Slave

Transport of CAS bits: 0

Transport of DTMF : 0

Frame Mode Data : 0

Fax : 0

Hit any key to continue...

Global Signaling

Ringing: 0

Normal: 5

Onhook: 5

Offhook: 15

CPS PARAMETERS

CPS Optimization: Single CPS no overlap

AAL2 Shaping mode : CBR

ISDN Activation Mode : Non Permanent

Figure 8-56. DSP SYSPARAMS

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Display Options

Display Commands 8-59

DSP USER

Purpose

Displays User interface information.

The parameters displayed are different for E1/FXS/ISDN.

Format

DSP USER

Use

1. Type: dsp user

2. Press <Enter>. The ISDN display is shown in Figure 8-57. The E1 display is shown in Figure 8-58. The FXS display is shown in Figure 8-59.

LA110> dsp user

ISDN Interface

Port Index in the Interface: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |

Channel : B1 B2 | B1 B2 | B1 B2 | B1 B2|

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Echo canceling : on on on on on on on on

Phantom : Enable Enable Enable Enable

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Figure 8-57. DSP USER – ISDN

LA110>dsp user

E1 Interface - USER side

Link type : E1

System clock : Adaptive Clock

Synchronization : FAST (1 sec)

Line code : HDB3

Framing : not multi-frame (G732N)

Receiver sensitivity : 30 DB

CRC-4 mode : on

Idle code : 7e

Signaling sample time : 100 msec

Figure 8-58. DSP USER – E1

Note

Chapter 8 Display Options LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

8-60 Display Commands

LA110>dsp user

FXS Interface

Coding law : A law

Polarity : Disable

Gain Tx : 0

Gain Rx : -10

Figure 8-59. DSP USER – FXS

PING

Purpose

Ping a host with an IP Address.

This is only relevant when the LAN is defined as a router.

Format

PING

Use

1. Type: ping

2. Press <Enter>.

3. Enter Destination IP address. A typical display is shown in Figure 8-60.

LA110> ping

Destination IP Number Time out(sec)

0 .0 .0 .0 1 1

Ping nr. 1 Time Out

Sent = 1 Received = 0 Success = 0% (0/1)

Time : min/av/max = 0 / 0 / 0 ms

Figure 8-60. PING

Note

Alarms 9-1

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics This chapter:

• Provides the LA-110 indications for proper functioning, as well as during failure.

• Lists all the alarms stored in LA-110 for troubleshooting.

• Describes the available diagnostics tests for LA-110 and provides troubleshooting instructions.

9.1 Front Panel Indicators and Switches

The activity and alarm indicators located on the LA-110 front panel indicate the unit current status for each module. They are described in Front Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators in Chapter 3.

9.2 Alarms

DSP ALM LA-110 maintains an alarm buffer. The buffer can store a maximum of the last 200 alarms, which can be displayed on the supervision terminal.

To display the alarms list:

1. Type: DSP ALM

2. Press <Enter>

Table 9-1 presents alarm messages displayed on the LA-110 and lists the actions required to correct each alarm condition.

To correct a reported problem, perform the actions in the given order, until the problem is corrected. If a problem cannot be corrected, have the LA-110 checked by the authorized technical support personnel.

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

9-2 Alarms

CLR ALM You can delete the event alarms from the buffer when they are no longer needed.

To clear the alarms list:

1. Type: CLR ALM

2. Press <Enter>. The alarms recorded in the LA-110 alarm buffer are erased.

Alarms List Table 9-1 includes the alarms messages in accordance with the type of alarm: general (concern the whole functioning of LA-110), Network, Data, and User lines.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Alarms 9-3

Table 9-1. LA-110 Alarms Buffer Messages

Alarm Syntax Description Corrective Actions

GENERAL ALARMS

ALARM BUFFER CLEAR

ALARM BUFFER OVERFLOW

More than 200 alarm entries have been written in the alarm buffer since the last clear command.

Read the messages. Send the CLR ALM command.

ATM LOSS OF CELL DELINEATION FAILURE

ATM layer detects an out-of-cell delineation (OCD) state on the ATM link.

Ensure equipment is connected to the other end of the ATM link.

ATM TX BANDWIDTH EXCEEDS MAXIMUM ALLOWED

The total data configured to the uplink exceeds the maximum bandwidth of the uplink

Reduce the number of connections defined on the LA-110.

CONFIG DATABASE CHECKSUM ERROR

The database currently stored in the non-volatile memory of the LA-110 is corrupted.

Note: This message appears only upon power-up.

Load the default configuration (from the supervision terminal, enter the INIT DB command) or from the boot manager.

Replace LA-110.

DB INITIALIZATION SWITCH IS ON

Jumper 2 is set to pins 1 and 2 For normal operation jumper 2 should be set to pins 2 and 3.

INTERNAL FAILURE Indicates that a failure has been detected. The text is followed by a code, intended for use by technical support personnel.

LA-110 requires servicing.

SENDING OAM VC-AIS CELLS

This message appears when the LA-110 starts or stops transmitting OAM cells of type VC-AIS on the ATM network interface.

Informative message – no action required.

SENDING OAM VC-RDI CELLS

This message appears when LA-110 starts or stops transmitting OAM cells of type VC-RDI on the ATM network interface.

Informative message – no action required.

SYSTEM CLOCK WAS CHANGED

The system clock parameter value (in the data base) was changed upon power-up.

Informative message–no action required.

RECEIVING OAM VC-AIS CELLS

This message appears when LA-110 starts or stops receiving OAM cells of type VC-AIS from the ATM network interface.

Informative message – no action required.

RECEIVING OAM VC-RDI CELLS

This message appears when LA-110 starts or stops receiving OAM cells of type VC-RDI from the ATM network interface.

Informative message – no action required.

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

9-4 Alarms

Table 9-1. LA-110 Alarms Buffer Messages (Cont.)

Alarm Syntax Description Corrective Actions

RESET OCCURRED This message appears when the unit has undergone a reset procedure without any proper command.

Informative message – no action required.

TOO QUIET ATM LINE The LA-110 stopped receiving user or OAM cells from the ATM network interface for too long. This alarm can appear only when the continuity check is activated.

Informative message – no action required.

USER PORT E1 ALARMS

USER PORT E1 AIS AIS being received at the user E1 interface.

Informative message – no action required.

USER PORT E1 AIS SYNC LOSS

AIS and local loss of frame alignment failure of the user E1 interface.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 user connections.

USER PORT E1 BPV ERROR

A bipolar violation error occurred at the user E1 interface.

Informative message – no action required. If condition persists, check the link to the remote equipment connected to the user E1 interface of LA-110, and the equipment itself.

USER PORT E1 BPV ERROR

A bipolar violation error occurred at the user E1 interface.

Informative message – no action required. If condition persists, check the link to the remote equipment connected to the user E1 interface of LA-110, and the equipment itself.

USER PORT E1 CRC-4 ERROR

A frame with CRC-4 error has been detected at ATM interface.

No action required.

USER PORT E1 EXCESSIVE BPV

Excessive number of bipolar violation errors at the user E1 interface.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 user’s link, and its connections.

USER PORT E1 EXCESSIVE ERROR RATIO

The bit error ratio (BER) at the user E1 interface exceeds the alarm threshold.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 user’s link and its connections.

USER PORT E1 LINK FRAME SLIP

A frame slip occurred at the user E1 interface.

Informative message – no action required. If condition persists, check the link to the remote equipment connected to the user’s E1 link interface of LA-110, and the equipment itself.

USER PORT E1 LINK SIGNAL LOSS

Loss of input signal of the user E1 interface.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 connections.

USER PORT E1 LOCAL MULTIFRAME ALARM

Local loss of multiframe alignment of the user E1 interface.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 connections.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Diagnostic Tests 9-5

Table 9-1. LA-110 Alarms Buffer Messages (Cont.)

Alarm Syntax Description Corrective Actions

USER PORT E1 LOCAL SYNC LOSS

Local loss of frame alignment failure of the User E1 interface.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 connections.

USER PORT E1 REMOTE MULTIFRAME ALARM

Loss of multiframe alignment of E1 interfaces with remote units.

Check the equipment serving the LA-110 connections.

USER PORT E1 REMOTE SYNC LOSS

The remote unit connected to the user E1 port reports loss of frame alignment.

Informative message – no action required. If condition persists, check the link to the remote equipment connected to the user E1 interface of the LA-110, and the equipment itself.

DATA PORT ALARMS

FRAME RELAY PORT CH1 LINK DOWN

The Frame Relay DATA port interface is unable to interwork with the far end using management protocol.

Ensure the far end equipment is configured to the same management protocol as that configured on DATA port 1 of the LA-110.

LOOPBACK ALARMS

NETWORK NETWORK REMOTE LOOP

Remote Network loopback Check the data link through the network, including the cables connecting the remote equipment to the LA-110, the transmission plant connecting the two LA-110 units, and the network interface of the local LA-110.

USER USER SIDE LOCAL LOOP

Local User loopback - for E1 Check the connections to the local user's equipment

DATA LOCAL LOOP Local Data loopback Check the connections to the user's equipment.

9.3 Diagnostic Tests

LOOPBACK Functions LA-110 supports several types of loopbacks:

• Remote Network loopback

• Local Data loopback

• Local User loopback - for E1.

The user can activate these loopbacks by a supervisory terminal, or by a management station. At any time, only one loopback can be activated. Therefore when a new loopback is activated, any previous user-controlled loopback is automatically deactivated.

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

9-6 Diagnostic Tests

The available loopback functions are described in the following paragraphs. The loopbacks are identified by the designation displayed by the supervision terminal.

REMOTE NETWORK Loopback The remote network loopback returns the received signal toward the network. The remote loopback is performed by connecting the network receive signal, after regeneration, to the input of the transmit path. The equipment connected to the remote end of the link, which must receive its own transmission, provides the test signal.

Figure 9-1 shows the signal paths for a typical remote network loopback.

This test performs a complete check of the data link through the network, including the cables connecting the remote equipment to the LA-110, the transmission plant connecting the two LA-110 units, and the network interface of the local LA-110.

NetworkInterface

NetworkPort

ProtocolConversion ATM

LA-110

DATAPort

E1Port

DATA Port

UserInterface

Figure 9-1. Remote Network Loopback

LOCAL DATA Loopback The local DATA port loopback returns the data port transmit signal via the receive path of the port.

While the loopback is connected, the equipment connected to the corresponding data port of the LA-110, which must receive its own transmission, provides the test signal. Note that the equipment must be able to handle the loopback situation appropriately, to prevent disruption of network operation by the loopback condition. During the loopback, the local LA-110 sends the processed data port data stream to the remote end of the link.

Figure 9-2 shows signal paths for a typical local DATA port loopback.

This test performs a complete check of the connections to the user's equipment.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Diagnostic Tests 9-7

NetworkInterface

UserInterface

DATA Port

UserInterface

NetworkPort

DATAPort

VoicePort

ProtocolConversion ATM

E1Port

LA-110

Figure 9-2. Local Data Port Loopback

LOCAL USER Loopback The local User loopback returns the User E1 transmit signal, after regeneration, via the receive path. While the loopback is connected, the equipment connected to the E1 port of LA-110, which must receive its own transmission, provides the test signal. During the loopback, the local LA-110 sends the processed User E1 data stream to the remote end of the link.

Figure 9-3 shows signal paths for a local User loopback. This test performs a complete check of the connections to the local user's equipment.

NetworkInterface

NetworkPort

ProtocolConversion ATM

LA-110

UserInterface

User Interface

VoicePort

E1Port

Figure 9-3. Local User Loopback

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

9-8 Loopbacks through the Supervision Terminal

9.4 Loopbacks through the Supervision Terminal

Loopback Control From the CONTROL connector in the back panel, the user can activate the loopbacks by a supervisory terminal or by a management station.

Only one loopback can be activated at any time.

LOOP

Purpose

Loopbacks are activated by means of the LOOP command, and deactivated using the CLR LOOP command. Only one loopback can be activated at a time. Therefore for your convenience the activation of a new loopback automatically deactivates any previous user-controlled loopback.

Use

1. Type: loop

2. Press <Enter>. The loopback selection screen appears. A typical screen is shown in Figure 9-4.

3. Select: Local Data, Local User, None, Remote Network.

Loopback: none

Figure 9-4. Loopback Selection Screen

To change the current state:

1. Press <F> or <B> to scroll through the available selections

2. Select the desired state and press <Enter>.

CLR LOOP

Purpose

The CLR LOOP command deactivates the currently active user-initiated loopback.

You do not need this command if you intend to activate a new loopback: when you enter a LOOP command to activate a new loopback, choose None. The command automatically deactivates any currently active user-initiated loopback.

Use

1. Type: clr loop

2. Press <Enter>. The active loopback is deactivated.

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Troubleshooting 9-9

9.5 Troubleshooting

If a problem occurs, check the displayed alarm messages (see DSP ALM in Chapter 8) and refer to Table 9-1 for the interpretation.

If the problem cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed in Table 9-1, identify the trouble symptoms and perform the actions listed under Corrective Measures in the order given, until the problem is corrected (see Table 9-2).

Table 9-2. Troubleshooting Chart

Trouble Symptoms Probable Cause Corrective Measures

LA-110 does not turn on. No power

1. Determine if the external power supply is faulty.

2. Check that both ends of the power cable are properly connected.

Defective LA-110 Replace LA-110

The equipment connected to a local LA-110 port cannot communicate with the remote end.

1. Configuration problems

Check the data port configuration, and the other LA-110 parameters.

2. External problem Activate the local loopback on the corresponding data port or user port. Check that the user's equipment receives its own signal while the loopback is connected. If it does, the problem is external.

3. Defective LA-110 Replace LA-110 if defective

The local LA-110 reports a SYNC LOSS LOCAL on the user port.

1. External problem Activate the remote user loopback. Check that the user port SYNC LOSS LOC indicator turns OFF. If the indicator turns OFF, the problem is external.

2. Defective LA-110 Replace LA-110

The SYNC LOSS REM user link indicator of the local LA-110 turns on.

External problem Activate the remote user loopback. Check that the user SYNC LOSS REM alarm is off while the loopback is activated. If the alarm turns OFF, the problem is at the remote equipment.

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Diagnostics LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

9-10 Troubleshooting

E1 Port Interface Connectors A-1

Appendix A Connector Wiring This appendix lists tables for connector wiring:

• E1 Port Interface Connectors

• RS-530 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cables

• V.35 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable

• X.21 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable

• Ethernet Interface Connector

• Power Supply Connector

A.1 E1 Port Interface Connectors

The TX and RX ports have two types of interfaces: unbalanced interfaces terminated in BNC connectors, and balanced interfaces. The balanced port interface is terminated in an eight-pin RJ-45C connector designated E1, and is wired in accordance with Table A-1.

Table A-1. E1 Connectors, Pin Allocation

Pin Function

1 R. Ring

2 R. Tip

3 Frame Ground

4 T. Ring

5 T. Tip

6 Frame Ground

7, 8 Not Connected

Appendix A Connector Wiring LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

A-2 RS-530 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cables

A.2 RS-530 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cables

Connector Pin Assignment The RS-530 data port interface has a 25-pin female connector wired in accordance with Table A-2. This port is intended for direct connection (using a cable wired point-to-point) to equipment with DTE interface.

Table A-2. RS-530 Interface DCE Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Direction Designation Function Rs-530 Circuit

1 √ FG Frame Ground AA

2 To LA-110 SDA Send Data A BA(A)

3 From LA-110 RDA Receive Data A BB(A)

4 To LA-110 RTSA Request to Send A CA(A)

5 From LA-110 CTSA Clear to Send A CB(A)

6 From LA-110 DSRA Data Set Ready A CC(A)

7 √ SG Signal Ground AB

8 From LA-110 DCDA Data Carrier Detect A CF(A)

9 From LA-110 RCB Receive Clock B DD(B)

10 From LA-110 DCDB Data Carrier Detect B CF(B)

11 To LA-110 SCEB Send External Clock B DA(B)

12 From LA-110 SCB Send Clock B DB(B)

13 From LA-110 CTSB Clear to Send B CB(B)

14 To LA-110 SDB Send Data B BA(B)

15 From LA-110 SCA Send Clock A DB(A)

16 From LA-110 RDB Receive Data B BB(B)

17 From LA-110 RCA Receive Clock A DD(A)

18 N/A – Not Connected –

19 To LA-110 RTSB Request to Send B CA(B)

20 To LA-110 DTRA Data Terminal Ready A CD(A)

21 N/A – Not Connected –

22 From LA-110 DSRB Data Set Ready B CC(B)

23 To LA-110 DTRB Data Terminal Ready B CD(B)

24 To LA-110 SCEA Send External Clock A DA(A)

25 N/A – Not Connected –

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connector Wiring

RS-530 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cables A-3

RS-530 DTE Adapter Cable To use the TX/RX LINK E1 port as a DTE interface, a cross adapter cable must be used to convert the physical port wiring to a DTE interface.

Table A-3 lists the wiring of the cross cable.

Table A-3. RS-530 DTE Interface Adapter Cable

Port Connector Function User’s Side Connector

1 Frame Ground 1

2 Send Data A 3

3 Receive Data A 2

4 Request to Send A 8

5 Clear to Send A –

6 Data Set Ready A –

7 Signal Ground 7

8 Data Carrier Detect A 4

9 Receive Clock B –

10 Data Carrier Detect B 19

11 Send External Clock B 12

12 Send Clock B –

13 Clear to Send B –

14 Send Data B 16

15 Send Clock A –

16 Receive Data B 14

17 Receive Clock A –

18 Not Connected –

19 Request to Send B 10

20 Data Terminal Ready A –

21 Not Connected –

22 Data Set Ready B –

23 Data Terminal Ready B –

24 Send External Clock A 15

25 Not Connected –

Appendix A Connector Wiring LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

A-4 RS-530 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cables

V.36/RS-449/422 DCE Interface Adapter Cable Table A-4 and Table A-5 provide the wiring of the cables used to convert the RS-530 port interface to V.36/RS-449/422 interfaces.

The V.36/RS-449/422 side connector is a 37-pin D-type connector (male connector for operation with DCE interface, and female connector for DTE interface).

Table A-4. V.36/RS-449/422 DCE Interface Adapter Cable (CBL-HS2R1)

Pin Direction Designation Function Rs-530 Circuit

1 – FG Frame Ground 1

2 To LA-110 SDA Send Data A 4

3 From LA-110 RDA Receive Data A 6

4 To LA-110 RTSA Request to Send A 7

5 From LA-110 CTSA Clear to Send A 9

6 From LA-110 DSRA Data Set Ready A 11

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 From LA-110 DCDA Data Carrier Detect A 13

9 From LA-110 RCB Receive Clock B 26

10 From LA-110 DCDB Data Carrier Detect B 31

11 To LA-110 SCEB Send External Clock B 35

12 From LA-110 SCB Send Clock B 23

13 From LA-110 CTSB Clear to Send B 27

14 To LA-110 SDB Send Data B 22

15 From LA-110 SCA Send Clock A 5

16 From LA-110 RDB Receive Data B 24

17 From LA-110 RCA Receive Clock A 8

18 N/A – Not Connected –

19 To LA-110 RTSB Request to Send B 25

20 N/A Not connected –

21 N/A – Not Connected –

22 From LA-110 DSRB Data Set Ready B 29

23 N/A – Not connected –

24 To LA-110 SCEA Send External Clock A 17

25 N/A – Not Connected –

Note

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connector Wiring

RS-530 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cables A-5

Table A-5. V.36/RS-449/422 DTE Interface Adapter Cable (CBL-HS2R3)

Pin Direction Designation Function Rs-530 Circuit

1 FG Frame Ground 1

2 To LA-110 SDA Send Data A 4

3 From LA-110 RDA Receive Data A 6

4 To LA-110 RTSA Request to Send A 7

5 From LA-110 CTSA Clear to Send A 9

6 From LA-110 DSRA Data Set Ready A 11

7 SG Signal Ground 19

8 From LA-110 DCDA Data Carrier Detect A 13

9 From LA-110 RCB Receive Clock B 26

10 From LA-110 DCDB Data Carrier Detect B 31

11 To LA-110 SCEB Send External Clock B 35

12 From LA-110 SCB Send Clock B 23

13 From LA-110 CTSB Clear to Send B 27

14 To LA-110 SDB Send Data B 22

15 From LA-110 SCA Send Clock A 5

16 From LA-110 RDB Receive Data B 24

17 From LA-110 RCA Receive Clock A 8

18 N/A Not Connected

19 To LA-110 RTSB Request to Send B 25

20 To LA-110 RCEA External Receive Clock A

21 N/A Not Connected

22 From LA-110 DSRB Data Set Ready B 29

23 To LA-110 RCEB External Receive Clock B

24 To LA-110 SCEA Send External Clock A 17

25 N/A Not Connected

Appendix A Connector Wiring LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

A-6 V.35 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable

A.3 V.35 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable

Connector Pin Assignment The V.35 data port has a 34-pin female connector wired in accordance with Table A-6.

Table A-6. V.35 Interface Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Direction Designation Function

A PG Protective Ground

B SG Signal Ground

C To LA-110 RTS Request to Send

D From LA-110 CTS Clear to Send

E From LA-110 DSR Data Set Ready

F From LA-110 DCD Data Carrier Detect

P To LA-110 TDA Transmit Data (A wire)

R From LA-110 RDA Receive Data (A wire)

S To LA-110 TDB Transmit Data (B wire)

T From LA-110 RDB Receive Data (B wire)

U To LA-110 ETCA External Transmit Clock (A wire)

V From LA-110 RCA Receive Clock (A wire)

W To LA-110 ETCB External Transmit Clock (B wire)

X From LA-110 RCB Receive Clock (B wire)

Y From LA-110 TCA Transmit Clock (A wire)

Z N/A – Not connected

AA From LA-110 TCB Transmit Clock (B wire)

BB N/A – Not connected

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connector Wiring

V.35 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable A-7

V.35 DTE Adapter Cable

Table A-7. V.35 DTE Adapter Cable

Port Connector Function User’s Side Connector

A Protective Ground A

B Signal Ground B

C Request to Send F

D Clear to Send –

E Data Set Ready –

F Data Carrier Detect C

P Transmit Data (A wire) R

R Receive Data (A wire) P

S Transmit Data (B wire) T

T Receive Data (B wire) S

U External Transmit Clock (A wire) Y

V Receive Clock (A wire) –

W External Transmit Clock (B wire) AA

X Receive Clock (B wire) –

Y Transmit Clock (A wire) U

Z Not connected –

AA Transmit Clock (B wire) W

BB Not connected –

Appendix A Connector Wiring LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

A-8 X.21 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable

A.4 X.21 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable

Connector Pin Assignment The X.21 interface has a 15-pin female D-type connector, wired in accordance with Table A-8.

Table A-8. X.21 Interface Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Direction Designation Function

1 FG Frame Ground

2 To LA-110 TA Transmit Data (A wire)

3 To LA-110 CA Control (A wire)

4 From LA-110 RA Receive Data (A wire)

5 From LA-110 IA Indication Data (A wire)

6 From LA-110 SA Signal Timing (A wire)

7 To LA-110 BA External Timing (A wire)

8 G Signal Ground

9 To LA-110 TB Transmit Data (B wire)

10 To LA-110 CB Control (B wire)

11 From LA-110 RB Receive Data (B wire)

12 From LA-110 IB Indication Data (B wire)

13 From LA-110 SB Signal Timing (B wire)

14 To LA-110 BB External Timing (B wire)

15 N/A Not Connected

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A Connector Wiring

X.21 Data Port Connector and Adapter Cable A-9

X.21 DTE Adapter Cable To use the port as a DTE interface, a cross adapter cable must be used to convert the physical port wiring to a DTE interface.

Table A-9 lists the wiring of the cross cable.

Table A-9. X.21 DTE Adapter Cable

Port Connector Function User’s Side Connector

1 Frame Ground 1

2 Transmit Data (A wire) 4

3 Control (A wire) 5

4 Receive Data (A wire) 2

5 Indication Data (A wire) –

6 Signal Timing (A wire) –

7 External Timing (A wire) 6

8 Signal Ground 8

9 Transmit Data (B wire) 11

10 Control (B wire) 12

11 Receive Data (B wire) 9

12 Indication Data (B wire) –

13 Signal Timing (B wire) –

14 External Timing (B wire) 13

15 Not Connected –

Appendix A Connector Wiring LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

A-10 Power Supply Connector

A.5 Ethernet Interface Connector

The LA-110 Ethernet interface is terminated in an RJ-45 connector, wired in accordance with Table A-10.

Table A-10. Ethernet Interface Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Direction Designation Function

1 To LA-110 TxD+ Transmit Data: wire +

2 To LA-110 TxD– Transmit Data: wire –

3 From LA-110 RxD+ Receive Data +

4 N/A – Not connected

5 N/A – Not connected

6 From LA-110 RxD– Receive Data –

7, 8 N/A – Not connected

A.6 Power Supply Connector

The Power Supply cable terminates in an 8-pin connector (see Figure A-1). The pin assignment is listed in Table A-11.

1 2 3 485 6 7

Figure A-1. Power Supply Connector

Table A-11. Power Supply Connector, Pin Assignment

Pin Designation Function

1 –33V Output

2 +5V Output

3 +3.3V Output

4 +3.3V Output

5 FGND Output

6 GND Output

7 GND Output

8 Power Good SIgnal Output

I-1

Index

—A— AAL1, 1-7, 4-2, 5-12

Stream mode, 8-20 AAL2, 4-3, 8-22 ACTIVATE CONN DATA, 6-4 ACTIVATE CONN LAN, 6-6 ACTIVATE CONN USER, 6-4 ACTIVATE ELCP, 6-20 ACTIVATE TFTP, 6-21 Activation Mode, 4-3 Active, 5-6, 5-13, 5-17, 5-19, 5-23, 5-27, 5-31,

5-36 Adaptation Layer, 4-2 adapter cable, A-3, A-7, A-9 ADD BUNDLE, 6-8 ADD CONN, 5-3 ADD CONN DATA, 5-4 ADD CONN LAN, 5-29 ADD CONN USER, 5-15

FXS, 5-16 ISDN, 5-18

ADD DHCP, 6-26 Add Duration, 6-32 ADD NAT, 6-24 ADD NMS, 6-2, 6-10, 6-16 ADD PAT, 6-22 ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, 6-13 ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN, 6-14 ADSL, 1-9 Aging Time, 4-21, 4-23 alarm buffer, 9-2 Alarm Buffer Messages, 9-3 Alarm Trap, 6-11 alarms, 8-4, 9-1

clear, 7-1 Allocated Buffers, 5-9, 5-30, 5-35 Annex, 4-12 ARP TABLE

LAN, 8-5 Asym. PSD, 4-12 ATM

performance monitoring, 8-19 ATM CoS, 1-13 Attenuation Type, 6-28, 6-33 Attenuation Value, 6-33

Auto Negotiation, 4-21, 4-22 Autobaud, 3-3

—B— B1 Channel - CID, 5-20 B2 Channel - CID, 5-20 balanced interface, 2-5 Baud, 4-14, 4-15, 4-24 BES, 8-42 Bit Rate, 5-9, 5-30, 5-35 Bits per Bin, 4-10 bridge, 1-4, 1-15, 4-20, 5-29, 5-32, 5-38, 8-14

Bridge Mode, 4-21 bundle, 8-6 Bundle Index, 5-21

—C— Cadence Ring, 6-28 Cadence Ring Type, 6-35 CAS, 4-3

CAS/CCS, 5-26 CBR, 5-29, 5-32 CDVT Optimization, 4-9 CES, 5-20 Channel Identification. See CID CID, 5-17, 5-27 CLLM, 4-14 clock, 1-8, 8-56 CLP->DE, 5-11 CLR ALM, 7-1, 9-2 CLR LOOP, 7-4, 9-8 CLR PM, 7-2 Coding Law, 4-2, 4-17 Collision Priority, 6-32 commands, 8-1

ACTIVATE CONN DATA, 6-4 ACTIVATE CONN LAN, 6-6 ACTIVATE CONN USER, 6-4 ACTIVATE ELCP, 6-20 ACTIVATE TFTP, 6-21 ADD BUNDLE, 6-8 ADD CONN DATA, 5-4 ADD CONN LAN, 5-29 ADD CONN USER, 5-15 ADD CONN USER FXS, 5-16

Index LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

I-2

ADD CONN USER ISDN, 5-18 ADD DHCP, 6-26 ADD NAT, 6-24 ADD NMS, 6-10 ADD PAT, 6-22 ADD STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, 6-13 ADD STATIC ROUTING LAN, 6-14 CLR ALM, 7-1, 9-2 CLR LOOP, 7-4, 9-8 CLR PM, 7-2 configuration, 6-1 control, 6-3 DEF ADDR ATM, 6-16 DEF ADDR ILMI, 6-17 DEF CLOCK, 3-13 DEF COMMUNITY, 6-18 DEF DATA, 4-13 DEF DATE, 3-14 DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN, 6-19 DEF LAN, 4-20 DEF NAME, 3-14 DEF NETWORK, 4-8 DEF PASSWORD, 3-12 DEF PSTN, 6-27 DEF SP PORT, 4-24 DEF SYSPARAMS, 1-4, 4-1 DEF TERM RESET, 6-22 DEF TERM SET, 3-11 DEF TIME, 3-15 DEF USER, 4-16 DEL BUNDLE, 6-9 DEL CONN DATA, 5-13 DEL CONN LAN, 5-37 DEL CONN USER, 5-28 DEL DHCP, 6-27 DEL NAT, 6-25 DEL NMS, 6-12 DEL PAT, 6-24 DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, 6-13 DEL STATIC ROUTING LAN, 6-15 DEL SYSERR, 7-4 DSP ADDR ATM, 8-3 DSP ADDR ILMI, 8-4 DSP ALM, 8-4, 9-1 DSP ARP TABLE LAN, 8-5 DSP BUNDLE, 8-6 DSP COMMUNITY, 8-7 DSP CONN DATA, 8-7 DSP CONN LAN, 8-8 DSP CONN USER, 8-10 DSP DATA, 8-11 DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN, 8-11 DSP DHCP, 8-12 DSP LAN, 8-13 DSP MAC ADDR LAN, 8-15 DSP NAT, 8-15 DSP NETWORK, 8-16 DSP NMS, 8-16 DSP PAT, 8-17 DSP PM ATM, 8-18

DSP PM CONN AAL2, 8-21 DSP PM CONN DATA, 8-19 DSP PM CONN LAN, 8-23 DSP PM CONN OAM DATA, 8-24 DSP PM CONN OAM LAN, 8-28 DSP PM CONN OAM USER, 8-31 DSP PM IP, 8-37 DSP PM LAN, 8-43 DSP PM NETWORK, 8-37 DSP PM OAM, 8-44, 8-45 DSP PM USER, 8-46 DSP PSTN, 8-50 DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN, 8-52 DSP SP PORT, 8-53 DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, 8-53 DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN, 8-54 DSP SYS, 8-55 DSP SYSERR, 8-56 DSP SYSPARAMS, 8-57 DSP USER, 8-59 EXIT, 7-2 HELP, 7-2 INIT DB, 7-3 LOOP, 6-20, 7-3, 9-8 MOD CONN DATA, 6-5 MOD CONN LAN, 6-7 MOD CONN NETWORK, 6-5 MOD CONN USER, 6-6 MOD NMS, 6-11 PING, 8-60 RESET, 7-4 supervision, 6-2

community, 6-18 community names, 8-7 configuration, 6-1

control port, 3-3 initial, 3-2, 3-3 ports, 4-8 procedure, 3-9, 5-1 terminal, 3-4

connection type transparent, 5-25

connections terminal, 3-4

Continuity Check, 5-8, 5-13, 5-17, 5-19, 5-22, 5-27, 5-31, 5-36

CPS, 4-3 CRC, 4-14, 8-42 CRC 4, 4-19 CSS, 8-42

—D— D Channel - CID, 5-20 Data, 4-24 database

initialize, 7-3 DB-CES, 5-20, 5-23 DCD&RTS, 4-15

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Index

I-3

DE<->CLP, 5-7 DE->CLP, 5-11 DEF ADDR ATM, 6-16 DEF ADDR ILMI, 6-17 DEF CLOCK, 3-13 DEF COMMUNITY, 6-18 DEF DATA, 4-13 DEF DATE, 3-14 DEF DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN, 6-19 DEF LAN, 4-20 DEF NAME, 3-14 DEF NETWORK, 4-8 DEF PASSWORD, 3-12 DEF PSTN, 6-27 DEF SP PORT, 4-24 DEF SYSPARAMS, 1-4, 4-1 DEF TERM RESET, 6-22 DEF TERM SET, 3-11 DEF TIME, 3-15 DEF USER, 4-16 default gateway, 8-12

LAN, 6-19 Default Type, 4-21, 4-23 DEL BUNDLE, 6-9 DEL CONN DATA, 5-13 DEL CONN LAN, 5-37 DEL CONN USER, 5-28 DEL DHCP, 6-27 DEL NAT, 6-25 DEL NMS, 6-12 DEL PAT, 6-24 DEL STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, 6-13 DEL STATIC ROUTING LAN, 6-15 DEL SYSERR, 7-4 DHCP, 1-5, 4-2, 5-34, 6-26, 6-27, 8-12 diagnostics, 1-5, 6-20, 9-1 Digit Parameters, 6-28, 6-35 Discarded Frames, 8-44 DLCI, 5-5 DSP ADDR ATM, 8-3 DSP ADDR ILMI, 8-4 DSP ALM, 8-4, 9-1 DSP ARP TABLE LAN, 8-5 DSP BUNDLE, 8-6 DSP COMMUNITY, 8-7 DSP CONN DATA, 8-7 DSP CONN LAN, 8-8 DSP CONN USER, 8-10 DSP DATA, 8-11 DSP DEFAULT GATEWAY LAN, 8-11 DSP DHCP, 8-12 DSP LAN, 8-13 DSP MAC ADDR LAN, 8-15 DSP NAT, 8-15

DSP NETWORK, 8-16 DSP NMS, 8-16 DSP PAT, 8-17 DSP PM ATM, 8-18 DSP PM CONN AAL2, 8-21 DSP PM CONN DATA, 8-19 DSP PM CONN LAN, 8-23 DSP PM CONN OAM DATA, 8-24 DSP PM CONN OAM LAN, 8-28 DSP PM CONN OAM USER, 8-31 DSP PM IP, 8-37 DSP PM LAN, 8-43 DSP PM NETWORK, 8-37 DSP PM OAM, 8-44 DSP PM OAM STATUS, 8-45 DSP PM USER, 8-46 DSP PSTN, 8-50 DSP ROUTING TABLE LAN, 8-52 DSP SP PORT, 8-53 DSP STATIC MAC ADDR LAN, 8-53 DSP STATIC ROUTING LAN, 8-54 DSP SYS, 8-55 DSP SYSERR, 8-56 DSP SYSPARAMS, 8-57 DSP USER, 8-59 Duration, 6-27 Duration type, 6-32

—E— E1 pinout, A-1 echo cancellation, 1-16, 4-18 ELCP, 6-20 Encapsulation, 4-21, 5-34 ES, 8-42 Ethernet pinout, A-10 EXIT, 7-2

—F— FECN, 5-7 frame relay, 1-10, 5-5 Framer Sync Status, 8-42 Framer Type, 4-11 Framing, 4-19 Framing Type, 4-9 front panel, 3-1 FR-SSCS-DLCI, 5-11

—G— G.SHDSL, 1-9, 4-11 Gains Rx/Tx, 4-17

—H— Hardware revision, 8-56 HELP, 7-2

Index LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

I-4

—I— Idle cell CLP, 4-9, 4-11 Idle Code, 4-19 Idle Signaling Bits, 5-24, 5-25 ILMI, 6-17, 8-4 indicators, 3-5 INIT DB, 7-3 installation, 2-2

control port connection, 2-7 data port connection, 2-6 E1 connection, 2-5 Ethernet port connection, 2-6 supervisory port connection, 2-6

Installation, 2-3, 4-8 Inter digit time, 6-35 interfaces, 1-8 Interworking, 5-6 Inverted Clock, 4-14, 4-15 IP, 4-23, 5-34

Virtual, 6-23 IP address, 8-3 IP Address, 6-16 IP routing, 1-4 ISDN Channels, 5-19

—J— Jitter Buffer, 1-13

—L— LA-110

applications, 1-2 features, 1-3 front panel, 3-1 general view, 1-6 options, 1-1 rear panel, 1-6, 2-3, 3-1 technical specifications, 1-21 turning off, 3-5 turning on, 3-4

LAN, 8-13, 8-15 LAN, 8-52 Leds

Status - Change, 6-11 Line Code, 4-19 Line Probe Enable, 4-12 Link Active Time, 5-34 Link-Down, 6-11 Link-Up, 6-11 LOFC, 8-42 login, 3-7 Log-off-time, 4-25 LOOP, 6-20, 7-3, 9-8 Loop Attenuation, 8-42 loopbacks

Local Data, 9-6 loopbacks, 9-5, 9-8

Local User, 9-7 Remote Network, 9-6

—M— MAC ADDR

Lan, 8-53 LAN, 6-13

MAC ADDR LAN, 6-13

management, 1-5, 1-16 Mask, 4-23, 5-27, 5-34, 6-15 Max Capability Advertised, 4-21, 4-22 Max Hop Count, 5-34 Maximum Burst Size. See MBS MaxRate, 4-12 MBS, 5-10, 5-32, 5-35 MinRate, 4-12 MOD CONN DATA, 6-5 MOD CONN LAN, 6-7 MOD CONN NETWORK, 6-5 MOD CONN USER, 6-6 MOD NMS, 6-11 Mode, 4-11, 5-7

—N— NAT, 6-24, 6-25, 8-15 National Profile, 6-32 network, 8-16 network management station, 8-16 Network Mode, 5-10 Network Timing Reference, 4-12 Next Hop IP, 6-15, 6-19 Number of periods, 6-28, 6-34

—O— OAM, 8-28, 8-31 OAM, 1-16, 8-27

Cells, 8-45 E1, 8-36 FXS, 8-35

OAM cell, 1-17, 8-31 Off Hook, 5-27, 6-32 On Hook, 5-27, 6-32 Op State, 8-42 out-of-band management, 1-16

—P— Parity, 4-25 password, 3-6, 5-34

security, 3-6 superuser, 3-6 user, 3-7

PAT, 6-22, 6-24, 8-17 PCR, 5-10, 5-32, 5-35 Peak Cell Rate. See PCR performance monitoring, 8-23, 8-46

LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual Index

I-5

ATM, 8-18 performance monitoring statistics, 8-31

clear, 7-1 Period Parameters, 6-34 Phantom, 4-18 Pilot Tone Request, 4-10 PING, 8-60 pinout, 2-5 Plug & Play, 1-5 plug-and-play, 5-1 Pointer Parity, 5-23, 5-24 Pop Alarm, 4-25 port

E1, 1-11 FXS, 1-12 ISDN, 1-12 LAN, 1-12 user port, 1-11 voice, 1-12

Port Index, 5-17, 5-19 ports, 1-8 power, 2-7 Power Backoff, 4-11 power supply

cable, A-10 Power Supply Connector, 2-7 PPPoA, 1-5 PPPoE, 1-5, 4-21 Protocol, 4-14, 6-23 PSTN, 4-3, 6-27, 8-50 pulse

Meter Pulse Frequency, 6-32 Number of periods, 6-34 Pulse Duration, 6-28, 6-34 Pulse Duration Type, 6-34 Pulse per hour, 6-33 Pulse Type, 6-34

—R— Rate Type, 6-28, 6-33 RDI statistics, 8-30 rear panel, 2-3, 3-1 Receive Frequency Bin, 4-10 Receiver Sensitivity, 4-19 Register Recall, 6-32 RESET, 7-4 RIP, 4-23, 5-34 router, 1-4, 1-14, 4-22, 8-14 Router, 5-37 Routing Information Protocol. See RIP RS-530 pinout, A-2 Rx Bytes Per Cell, 5-13, 5-21 Rx Idle, 5-25

—S— SCR, 5-10, 5-32, 5-35

Scramble, 4-9, 4-11 Service Mode, 5-6 service types, 1-5 SES, 8-42 Shaping Mode, 4-3 Signal, 6-32 Signaling, 5-23 Signaling Sample Time, 4-19 SNR, 8-42 Software version, 8-56 SSCS, 4-3 Standard Compliance, 4-10 Startup Margin, 4-12 STATIC ROUTING

LAN, 8-54 STATIC ROUTING

LAN, 6-14, 6-15 Static Routing Address Table, 6-15 statistics, 1-5, 1-17, 8-19

ATM, 1-17 data port, 1-17 E1, 1-17 Ethernet port, 1-17

supervision terminal, 3-5 supervisory port, 1-16, 8-53 Sustained Cell Rate. See SCR Synchronization, 4-19 Sysparams parameters, 4-6

—T— Telnet, 3-3 terminal screen, 3-7 tests, 7-3 TFTP, 6-21 time slot, 8-6 Timeout, 4-23 timeslots, 6-8 timing, 1-12 Total Frames, 8-44 traffic shaping, 1-4, 1-8, 4-11, 5-12

CBR, 1-14 UBR, 1-14 VBR, 1-14

Transmission Frequency Bin, 4-10 Transmission Mode, 4-10 Transmission Power Attenuation, 4-10 Trellis Coding, 4-9 troubleshooting, 9-9 Tx Bytes Per Cell, 5-13, 5-22 Tx Idle, 5-25

—U— UAS, 8-42 unbalanced interface, 2-5

Index LA-110 Installation and Operation Manual

I-6

UPLINK, 8-18 User Name, 5-34

—V— V.35 pinout, A-6 V.36/RS-449/422 interfaces, A-4 VBR, 5-9, 5-32 VCI, 5-6, 5-13, 5-19, 5-21, 5-27, 5-30, 5-34, 6-16,

6-17, 8-3

Virtual Circuit Identifier. See VCI voice and data convergence, 1-4 voice module, 1-7 VPI, 5-5, 5-13, 5-17, 5-19, 5-21, 5-27, 5-30, 5-34,

6-16, 6-17, 8-3

—X— X.21 pinout, A-8

24 Raoul Wallenberg St., Tel Aviv 69719, IsraelTel: +972-3-6458181, Fax: +972-3-6483331, +972-3-6498250E-mail: , Web site:

Customer Response Form RAD Data Communications would like your help in improving its product documentation. Please complete and return this form by mail or by fax or send us an e-mail with your comments. Thank you for your assistance!

Manual Name: ______________________________________________________________

Publication Number: __________________________________________________________ Please grade the manual according to the following factors:

Excellent Good Fair Poor Very Poor

Installation instructions Operating instructions Manual organization Illustrations The manual as a whole

What did you like about the manual? ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________

erika_y@rad.co.il www.rad.com

LA-110

144-200-11/02

Error Report Type of Error(s) Incompatibility with product

or Problem(s): Difficulty in understanding text

Regulatory information (Safety, Compliance, Warnings, etc.)

Difficulty in finding needed information

Missing information

Illogical flow of information

Style (spelling, grammar, references, etc.)

Appearance

Other _________

Please list the exact page numbers with the error(s), detail the errors you found (information missing, unclear or inadequately explained, etc.) and attach the page to your fax, if necessary. _________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Please add any comments or suggestions you may have. _________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

You are: Distributor

End user

VAR

Other ________________________

Who is your distributor? _______________________________

Your name and company: ___________________________________________________________

Job title: __________________________________________________________________________

Address: __________________________________________________________________________

Direct telephone number and extension: _______________________________________________

Fax number: ______________________________________________________________________

E-mail: _____________________________________________________________________

900 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, N.J. 07430, Tel: (201) 529-1100

24 Raoul Wallenberg Street, Tel Aviv 69719, Israel, Tel: 972-3-6458181

U.S. HEADQUARTERS:

INTERNATIONAL HEADQUARTERS:

Publication No. 144-200-11/02

www.rad.com

Fax: 972-3-6498250, 972-3-6474436, Email: rad@rad.co.il

Toll Free: 1-800-444-7234, Fax: (201) 529-5777, Email: market@radusa.com